Chrysler Automobile 2006 Sebring Sedan User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION  
PAGE  
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277  
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
1
CONTENTS  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
INTRODUCTION  
INTRODUCTION  
WARNING!  
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of  
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with  
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is  
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and  
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to  
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-  
tions and recommendations in this manual will help  
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain  
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,  
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-  
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored  
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with  
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be  
aware of all safety warnings.  
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL  
Consult the table of contents to determine which section  
contains the information you desire.  
When it comes to service, remember that your manufac-  
turers dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-  
trained technicians and genuine Moparparts, and is  
interested in your satisfaction.  
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a  
complete listing of all subjects.  
Consult the following table for a description of the  
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout  
this owners manual:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INTRODUCTION  
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
INTRODUCTION  
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS  
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating  
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily  
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures  
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do  
not read this entire manual you may miss important  
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on a stamped  
plate on the left front corner on the body of the vehicle,  
visible through the windshield. This number also ap-  
pears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label  
affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label as a  
convenient record of your vehicle identification number  
and optional equipment.  
Vehicle Identification Number  
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS  
WARNING!  
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle  
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety  
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2
CONTENTS  
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Central Locking — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Door Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Automatic (Rolling) Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
To Unlock The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .23  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .46  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
9
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS  
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with  
either side up.  
Ignition Key Removal  
2
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key  
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can  
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask  
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe  
place.  
Ignition Key Positions  
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the  
gearshift knob push button has returned to the out  
position. Turn the key to the Lock position and remove  
the key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place  
the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-  
rarily in the key cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key  
clockwise slightly, then remove the key as described. If a  
malfunction occurs, the system may trap the key in the  
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is  
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but  
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.  
CAUTION!  
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always  
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors  
when leaving the vehicle unattended.  
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System  
This system prevents the key from being removed unless  
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of  
PARK unless the key is in the OFF or RUN positions.  
WARNING!  
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger-  
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others could  
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch  
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector  
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child  
could operate power windows, other controls, or  
move the vehicle.  
Key-In-Ignition Reminder  
Opening the drivers door when the key is in the ignition  
and is in the OFF, LOCK, or ACC position, sounds a  
signal to remind you to remove the key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11  
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED  
the vehicle. These devices cannot damage the Sentry  
Key System, but can cause a momentary problem  
when attempting to start the engine. If a problem  
occurs, remove the Sentry Key from the key ring and  
restart the vehicle. Pagers, cell phones, walkmans, etc.,  
have no effect on this system.  
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key  
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics  
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue  
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal the  
vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds then shut off. The  
system will allow the engine to be started and run (for 2  
seconds) up to six times after which the starter motor will  
be disabled and the engine will not crank.  
2
The Theft Alarm Light, located on the instrument cluster  
to the right of the fuel gauge, will illuminate for about 3  
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the On  
position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid  
signal from the ignition key, the theft alarm light will  
flash continuously to signal that the vehicle has been  
immobilized. If the Theft Alarm Light remains On during  
vehicle operation, it indicates a fault in the system  
electronics.  
NOTE:  
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible  
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems  
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of  
security protection.  
Additional Sentry Keys or Mobil Speed Pass™ devices  
held too close to the ignition key when starting the  
vehicle may cause problems when attempting to start  
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have  
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Replacement Keys  
Customer Key Programming  
You can program new keys to the system if you have two  
valid keys by doing the following:  
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the  
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once  
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can  
not be programmed to any other vehicle.  
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the  
ignition On for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15  
seconds.  
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided  
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required  
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may  
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the  
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure  
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle  
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been  
programmed.  
Turn the ignition Off and remove the first key.  
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition On  
within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime will sound  
and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.  
Turn the ignition Off and remove the second key.  
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch  
the ignition On within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds a  
single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light will stop  
flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.  
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,  
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.  
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this  
process to program up to a total of 8 keys.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13  
General Information  
DOOR LOCKS  
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
WARNING!  
2
1. this device may not cause harmful interference  
For personal security and safety in the event of an  
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive and  
when you park and leave the vehicle.  
2. this device must accept any interference that may be  
received, including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation  
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM  
WARNING!  
The interior lights will come on when you open any door,  
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry (if so  
equipped) or central unlock (if so equipped). They will  
remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed  
then fade to off.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-  
ries and death.  
The lights also will turn off if you turn on the ignition  
after you close all doors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Power Door Locks  
There is a door lock switch on each front door trim panel  
located to the front of the door handle. Press this switch  
to lock or unlock the four doors.  
Door Lock Plunger  
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,  
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure that the keys are  
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.  
Power Door Lock Switch  
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle  
until you pull up the lock plungers.  
If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the  
ignition switch, and the drivers door is open, the doors  
will not lock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15  
Central Locking — If Equipped  
The Automatic Door Locks can be disabled or re-enabled  
by performing the following procedure:  
All vehicle doors are locked with the first turn of the key  
to the LOCK position. The double activation feature  
requires you to turn the key in the cylinder lock two  
times within five seconds to UNLOCK all vehicle doors  
at once.  
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.  
2
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON/ RUN  
and back to OFF 4 times ending up in the OFF position.  
Door Ajar Warning  
If you move the vehicle and a door is not completely  
closed, the word DOOR will replace the odometer dis-  
play and a chime will sound once. The odometer display  
will reappear once the door is closed.  
Automatic (Rolling) Door Locks  
The doors will lock automatically, as programmed from  
the factory, if:  
1. The transaxle is in gear,  
2. All doors are closed,  
Ignition Key Position  
3. Vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/ h),  
4. The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.  
Automatic Unlock on Exit — Only Available if  
Automatic Door Locks are Enabled  
This feature will unlock all the doors when the drivers  
door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK  
position. This function is disabled as delivered from the  
factory. Automatic Unlock on Exit can be enabled or  
disabled by performing the following procedure:  
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.  
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON/ RUN  
and back to OFF 4 times ending up in the OFF position.  
3. Depress the power door lock switch to unlock the  
doors.  
Power Door Lock Switch  
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the  
programming.  
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the  
programming.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17  
“Child Protection” Door Lock System (Rear  
Doors)  
To provide a safer environment for small children riding  
in the rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the  
“child-protection” door lock system.  
2
To use the system, open each rear door and use a key to  
move the control near the door latch UP to the “Engage”  
position as shown on the door label. When the system on  
a door is engaged, that door can be opened only by using  
the outside door handle. This will occur even though the  
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.  
Child Lock Control  
WARNING!  
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,  
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), lower the  
window and open the door with the outside door handle.  
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.  
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened  
from the outside when the child protection locks are  
engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED  
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or  
open the trunk from distances up to 23 feet (7 meters)  
using a transmitter. You dont have to point the transmit-  
ter at the vehicle to activate the system.  
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmit-  
ter.  
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4  
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the LOCK  
button.  
3. Release both buttons.  
The headlights will flash twice to acknowledge the  
unlock signal.  
NOTE: The Lamp Flash can be enabled or disabled by  
performing the following procedure:  
Keyless Entry Transmitter  
To unlock the doors:  
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.  
Press and release the UNLOCK button once to unlock the  
drivers door. Press the button twice within 5 seconds to  
unlock all doors. If your vehicle is equipped with Illumi-  
nated Entry, the interior lights also come on and remain  
on for about 30 seconds, when you unlock the doors.  
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but  
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Trunk  
button.  
3. Release both buttons.  
NOTE: The system may be programmed to unlock all  
the doors upon the first press of the Unlock button. To  
toggle between the first press unlock of the drivers door  
to unlock of all doors, perform the following procedure:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19  
To lock the doors:  
The horn will chirp and the headlamps will flash once to  
acknowledge the lock signal.  
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4  
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Trunk  
button.  
2
NOTE: The horn chirp can be enabled or disabled by  
3. Release both buttons.  
the following procedure:  
Panic Alarm  
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.  
The panic mode unlocks the drivers door, turns on the  
interior lights, flashes the headlights, and sounds the  
horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.  
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but  
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Unlock  
button.  
To use the Panic Alarm:  
Press and hold the Panic Button for at least 1 second to  
activate the panic alarm. Press and hold the panic button  
a second time or unlock the door with the key (if  
equipped with central locking) to deactivate the alarm.  
The alarm will also shut itself off after 3 minutes, or when  
the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/ h).  
3. Release both buttons.  
To unlock the trunk:  
Press and hold the Trunk button on the transmitter to  
unlatch the trunk.  
NOTE: The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch  
the trunk immediately upon activation of the Trunk  
button (without pressing and holding) by performing the  
following procedure:  
To Program Additional Transmitters:  
Up to 4 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle.  
To program a transmitter, perform the following proce-  
dure:  
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmit-  
ter.  
1. With the vehicle in Park, turn the ignition switch to the  
ON/ RUN position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
2. Using a currently programmed transmitter, press the  
Unlock button on the transmitter. Continue to hold the  
Unlock button, wait at least 4 but no longer than 10  
seconds, then press and hold the Panic button for at least  
one second. Release both buttons simultaneously. You  
will hear a chime to signal that you can proceed with  
programming the new transmitter.  
General Information  
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and  
with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received, including interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation  
3. Press and release the Lock and Unlock buttons simul-  
taneously, followed by a press and release of ANY button  
on each new transmitter to be programmed as well as the  
original transmitter. You will hear a chime when a  
transmitter has been successfully programmed. You will  
have 30 seconds to finish programming all new transmit-  
ters. A chime will sound when the 30 seconds is over or  
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.  
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a  
normal distance, check for these two conditions:  
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of  
batteries is from one to two years  
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station  
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21  
Transmitter Battery Service  
The recommended replacement batteries are CR2016.  
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves  
together and test transmitter operation.  
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar  
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket  
material during removal.  
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM  
The system monitors the doors, trunk, and ignition for  
unauthorized operation.  
2
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for  
up to 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn will  
sound and the headlights and interior lights will flash.  
Then the horn will stop and if the source of the trigger is  
still present, the lights will continue to flash for another  
15 minutes.  
NOTE: The engine will not start until you disarm the  
system.  
To set the alarm:  
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out  
of the vehicle.  
Separating Transmitter Halves  
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the  
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause  
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it  
with rubbing alcohol.  
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,  
the key, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all  
doors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. The light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly  
for 15 seconds. This shows that the system is arming. If  
the light comes on but does not flash, the system is still  
armed, but there is a problem in the trunk circuit. After 15  
seconds the light will continue to flash slowly. This  
shows that the system is fully armed.  
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE  
To disarm the system:  
Unlock a front door using either the key or the Keyless  
Entry Transmitter.  
Tamper Alert  
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door  
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the  
alarm had been triggered. Check the vehicle for tamper-  
ing.  
Trunk Release Button  
Use the key or the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to  
open the trunk from outside the vehicle. From inside the  
car the trunk lid can be released by depressing the Trunk  
Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left  
of the steering wheel. The transmission must be in Park  
before the switch will operate. Vehicles with manual  
transmissions must be at zero mph for the switch to  
work.  
Security System Manual Override  
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the  
manual lock control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23  
With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will be displayed  
in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk  
is open. The odometer display will reappear once the  
trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed.  
Trunk Internal Emergency Release  
2
With the key in lock position or key out, the “deck” will  
be displayed until the trunk is closed.  
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING  
WARNING!  
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,  
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or  
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the  
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in  
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,  
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped  
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or  
heat stroke.  
Emergency Release  
NOTE: As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emer-  
gency Release lever is built into the trunk latching  
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked  
inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by  
pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the  
trunk latching mechanism. See picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
WINDOWS  
WARNING!  
Power Windows  
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in  
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-  
tended children, can become entrapped by the  
power windows while operating the power window  
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury  
or death.  
The window controls on the drivers door operate all  
windows.  
The drivers window switch has an Auto Down feature.  
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the  
window will go down automatically.  
Power Window Switches  
To open the window part way, pull the window switch  
part way and release it when you want the window to  
stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25  
Wind Buffeting  
Please pay close attention to the information in this  
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system  
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as  
possible.  
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of  
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the  
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the  
windows down, or in certain open or partially open  
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be mini-  
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows  
open, open the front and rear windows together to  
minimize the buffeting.  
2
WARNING!  
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer  
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-  
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or  
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the  
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your  
vehicle are buckled up properly.  
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS  
Some of the most important safety features in your  
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front  
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front  
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so  
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and  
passengers seated next to a window. If you will be  
carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seat  
belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint  
systems.  
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even  
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver  
and cause a collision which includes you. This can  
happen far away from home or on your own street.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they  
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some  
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown  
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of  
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the  
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should  
be belted at all times.  
WARNING!  
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat  
belts are designed to go around the large bones of  
your body. These are the strongest parts of your  
body and can take the forces of a collision the  
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could  
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You  
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even  
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-  
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep  
your passengers safe, too.  
Lap/Shoulder Belts  
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts.  
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during  
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the  
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under  
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock  
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle  
or being thrown out.  
Two people should never be belted into a single  
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one  
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.  
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for  
more than one person, no matter what their size.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions  
WARNING!  
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and  
adjust the front seat.  
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will  
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride  
too high on your body, possibly causing internal  
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle  
nearest you.  
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.  
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch  
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt  
go around your lap.  
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.  
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,  
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat  
belt snugly.  
A belt that is worn under your arm is very  
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside sur-  
faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head  
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause  
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder  
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your  
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.  
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect  
you from injury during a collision. You are more  
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not  
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt  
are meant to be used together.  
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch  
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your  
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up  
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too  
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug  
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a  
collision.  
WARNING!  
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of  
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t  
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your  
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-  
sible and keep it snug.  
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision  
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.  
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it  
to your dealer and have it fixed.  
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is  
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor  
will withdraw any slack in the belt.  
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.  
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.  
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to  
allow the belt to retract fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29  
WARNING!  
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision  
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt  
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose  
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.  
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt  
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they  
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,  
etc.).  
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage  
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will  
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,  
youll prefer a higher position. When you release the  
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that  
it is locked in position.  
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt  
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt  
away from your neck. Push the lever above the webbing  
upward to release the anchorage, and then move it up or  
down to the position that serves you best.  
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to  
position the belt away from your neck.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Seat Belt Pretensioners  
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to  
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the  
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to  
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96  
seconds or until the drivers seat belt is buckled or the  
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/ h). The Enhanced  
Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the  
drivers seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds  
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/ h).  
The seat belts for both front seating positions are  
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to  
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a  
collision. These devices improve the performance of the  
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the  
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all  
size occupants, including those in child restraints.  
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper  
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still  
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.  
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-  
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by  
following these steps:  
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-  
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,  
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision  
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-  
sioners, both must be replaced.  
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first  
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON  
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-  
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System  
(BeltAlert).  
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System  
(BeltAlert)  
If the drivers seat belt has not been buckled within 60  
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is  
greater than 5 mph (8 km/ h), the Enhanced Warning  
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and  
buckle the drivers seat belt.  
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning  
Light to turn off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31  
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle  
and then re-buckle the drivers seat belt at least three  
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt  
buckled.  
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt  
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.  
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the  
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take  
the force if there is a collision.  
2
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on  
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.  
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.  
Seat Belt Extender  
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and  
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so  
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can  
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender  
should be used only if the existing belt is not long  
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender  
and store it.  
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to  
signify that you have successfully completed the pro-  
gramming.  
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-  
vated by repeating this procedure.  
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System  
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning  
Light will continue to illuminate while the drivers seat  
belt remains unbuckled.  
WARNING!  
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can  
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use  
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is  
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating  
positions. Remove and store the extender when not  
needed.  
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women  
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts  
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is  
the best way to keep the baby safe.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental  
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag  
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right  
window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting  
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window  
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their  
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.  
Front Airbag Components  
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and  
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint  
systems. The drivers airbag is mounted in the center of  
the steering wheel. The passengers front airbag is  
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-  
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the  
airbag covers.  
Window Airbag  
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the  
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-  
ment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33  
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along  
with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instru-  
ment panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection  
for the driver and front passenger. Left and right window  
airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant  
protection.  
WARNING!  
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag  
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may  
damage the airbags and you could be injured be-  
cause the airbags are not there to protect you. These  
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-  
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.  
2
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types  
of collisions. The front airbags deploy only in moderate  
to severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,  
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is  
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain  
types of collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the  
seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags  
to protect you properly.  
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right  
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo  
up high enough to block the location of the  
window bag. The area where the window bag is  
located should remain free from any obstructions.  
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right  
window bags, do not have any accessory items  
installed which will alter the roof, including add-  
ing a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof  
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts  
or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do  
not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.  
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in  
any way.  
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize  
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.  
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled  
up in the rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child restraints  
should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a  
passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could  
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.  
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster  
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the  
vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should  
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-  
positioning booster seats.  
WARNING!  
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more  
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work  
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In  
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.  
Always wear your seat belts even though you  
have airbags.  
Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-  
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled  
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the  
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.  
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause  
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit  
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach  
the steering wheel or instrument panel.  
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front  
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the  
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child  
restraint. See the section on “Child Restraint”.  
2. You should read the instructions provided with your  
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.  
If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they  
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the  
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the  
seat.  
3. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.  
4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved  
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.  
Airbag System Components  
5. If your vehicle has left and right window bags, do not  
lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into  
the space between you and the door.  
The front airbag system consists of the following:  
Airbag Control Module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35  
AIRBAG Readiness Light  
Driver Airbag  
The airbag control module will not detect rollover or  
rear collisions.  
The airbag control module also monitors the readiness  
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the  
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.  
These include all of the items listed above except the  
knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering  
wheel and column. If the key is in the “off” position, in  
the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are  
not on and will not inflate.  
Passenger Airbag  
2
Steering Wheel and Column  
Instrument Panel  
Interconnecting Wiring  
Knee Impact Bolsters  
Left and Right Window Bags Above Side Windows —  
If Equipped  
The airbag control module also turns on the  
AIRBAG light in the instrument panel for 6 to  
8 seconds when the ignition is first turned on,  
Left and Right Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped  
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners  
then turns the light off. If it detects a malfunction in  
any part of the system, it turns on the light either  
momentarily or continuously.  
How The Airbag System Works  
The airbag control module determines if a frontal  
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to  
inflate. The control module receives the level of colli-  
sion severity, determines the proper level of airbag to  
be deployed. The frontal airbag inflators are designed  
to provide three different rates of air bag inflation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags  
do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.  
WARNING!  
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel  
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect  
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays  
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you  
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.  
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and  
position you for the best interaction with the front airbag.  
If A Deployment Occurs  
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the airbag  
control module detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to  
help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then to  
immediately deflate.  
When the airbag control module detects a collision  
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A  
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate  
the airbags. Three levels of airbag inflation rates are  
possible. These rates are determined by the airbag  
control module based on collision severity. The airbag  
covers separate and fold out of the way as the airbags  
inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in  
about 60 milliseconds. This is only about half of the  
time it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then  
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and  
front passenger. The drivers front airbag gas is vented  
through a vent hole in the rear of the airbag. The  
passengers front airbag gas is vented through vent  
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need  
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does  
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.  
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any  
or all of the following may occur:  
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-  
sions and/ or skin reddening to the driver and right  
front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The  
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those  
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium  
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.  
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37  
However, if you havent healed significantly within a  
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor  
immediately.  
Side Airbag System  
The airbag control module determines if a side collision is  
severe enough to require the airbag to inflate. The control  
module receives the level of collision severity from the  
side impact sensors. The airbag control module will not  
detect rollover or rear impacts.  
2
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like  
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the  
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag  
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,  
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,  
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat  
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,  
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your  
clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instruc-  
tions for cleaning.  
The side impact SRS Airbags are designed to activate  
only in certain side collisions. When the airbag control  
module detects a collision requiring the window bags to  
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the  
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate  
the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the  
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and inflates  
(in about the same time it takes to blink your eyes) with  
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and  
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area  
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to  
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags  
have been deployed. If you are involved in another  
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.  
children. The window bag is only about 3 2 inches (8 34  
cm) thick when it is inflated.  
1
WARNING!  
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-  
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized  
dealer as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Maintaining Your Airbag System  
Airbag Light  
You will want to have the airbags ready for your protec-  
tion in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to  
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have  
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:  
WARNING!  
Modifications to any part of the airbag system  
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could  
be injured because the airbags are not there to  
protect you. Do not modify the components or  
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or  
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or  
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do  
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-  
ture, or frame.  
The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during  
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first  
turned on.  
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second  
interval.  
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while  
driving.  
You need proper knee impact protection in a  
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket  
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.  
Child Restraint  
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the  
time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United  
States and all Canadian provinces require that small  
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,  
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.  
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the  
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who  
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39  
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-  
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash  
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seats rather than in the front.  
Infants and Child Restraints  
Safety experts recommend that children ride  
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least  
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types  
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant  
carriers and “convertible” child seats.  
2
WARNING!  
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the  
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up  
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be  
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher  
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than  
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing  
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are  
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are  
held in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the  
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the  
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System section.)  
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny  
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The  
force required to hold even an infant on your lap  
could become so great that you could not hold the  
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and  
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in  
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the  
child’s size.  
There are different sizes and types of restraints for  
children from newborn size to the child almost large  
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child  
seat Owners Manual to ensure you have the right seat  
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your  
child:  
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in  
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag  
deployment could cause severe injury or death to  
infants in this position.  
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure  
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle  
where you will use it before you buy it.  
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs  
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for  
weight and height limits.  
WARNING!  
Improper installation can lead to failure of an  
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a  
collision. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-  
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.  
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the  
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may  
not work when you need it.  
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child  
restraint manufacturers directions.  
A rearward facing child restraint should only be  
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-  
straint in the front seat may be struck by a  
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-  
vere or fatal injury to the infant.  
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the  
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.  
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or  
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs  
and cause serious personal injury.  
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child  
restraint:  
NOTE:  
For additional information refer to  
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.  
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it  
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41  
Older Children and Child Restraints  
over the front of the seat when their back is against the  
seat back, should use the lap/ shoulder belt in a rear seat.  
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are  
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the  
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child  
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children  
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older  
than one year. These child seats are also held in the  
vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the LATCH child  
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH — Child  
Seat Anchorage System Section.)  
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.  
2
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug  
as possible.  
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or  
slouching can move the belt out of position.  
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the  
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a  
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind  
their back.  
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing  
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit  
the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit  
with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the  
childs back is against the seat back, they should use a  
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-  
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the  
lap/ shoulder belt.  
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower  
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)  
Your vehicles rear seat is equipped with the child  
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH  
system provides for the installation of the child restraint  
without using the vehicles seat belts, instead securing  
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper  
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle  
structure.  
Children Too Large For Booster Seats  
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt  
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-  
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be  
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems  
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to  
also have features for installation using the vehicles seat  
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for  
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-  
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many  
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap  
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all  
the available attachments provided with your child re-  
straint in any vehicle.  
use the vehicles seat belt at the center position. If your  
child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only  
install the child restraints using the vehicles seat belts.  
Please refer to the next section for typical installation  
instructions.  
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages  
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible  
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower at-  
tachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments  
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regard-  
less of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER  
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats  
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing  
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seat-  
ing positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the  
vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must  
LATCH  
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint  
System  
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the  
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all  
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43  
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that  
were provided with the child restraint system.  
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and  
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the  
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next  
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the  
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.  
Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind  
the seat where you are placing the child restraint and  
attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to  
route the tether strap to provide the most direct path  
between the anchor and the child restraint. If your  
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,  
raise the head restraint and, where possible, route the  
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two  
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and route  
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head  
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the  
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,  
removing slack in the straps according to the child  
restraint manufacturers instructions.  
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at  
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back,  
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to  
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you  
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and  
seat cushion surfaces.  
2
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages  
behind each rear seating position located in the  
panel between the rear seat back and the rear  
window. These tether strap anchorages are  
under a hinged plastic cover with this symbol on it.  
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with  
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or  
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a  
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-  
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant  
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a  
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a  
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.  
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to  
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts  
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out  
of reach of children. It is recommended that before  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the  
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of  
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child  
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt  
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the  
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should  
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.  
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are  
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave  
your child unattended in the vehicle.  
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use  
a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the  
lap/ shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch  
plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt  
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-  
ally and pull it tight if necessary.  
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the  
lap/ shoulder belt on the child restraint because the  
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening  
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the  
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times  
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the  
release button facing out.  
WARNING!  
Improper installation of a child restraint to the  
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or  
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or  
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly  
when installing an infant or child restraint.  
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if by pulling and  
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need  
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from  
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch  
plate into the buckle again. If you still cant make the  
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.  
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat  
belt  
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch  
plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45  
Child restraint tether strap attachment  
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head  
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard  
side of the head restraint.  
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the  
seat where you are placing the child restraint.  
2
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint  
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap  
according to the child restraint manufacturers instruc-  
tions.  
WARNING!  
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  
increased head motion and possible injury to the  
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind  
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether  
strap.  
Tether Strap Mounting  
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path  
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If  
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head  
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,  
route the tether strap under the head restraint and  
Transporting Pets  
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.  
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly  
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in  
a collision.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses  
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.  
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few  
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the  
break-in and not an indication of a problem.  
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS  
The engine in your new vehicle does not require a long  
break-in period.  
SAFETY TIPS  
Exhaust Gas  
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).  
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55  
mph (80 or 90 km/ h) are desirable.  
WARNING!  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.  
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can  
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)  
follow the safety tips below.  
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the  
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.  
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be  
detrimental and should be avoided.  
The crankcase oil installed in the engine at the factory is  
a high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil  
changes should be consistent with expected climate con-  
ditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The  
recommended viscosity and quality grades are in Section  
7 of this manual.  
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined  
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in  
or out of the area.  
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the  
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-  
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower  
at high speed.  
Do not use non-detergent or straight mineral oils.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47  
To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close  
the trunk while driving. However, if for some reason it  
must remain open, close all windows. Adjust the  
heating or cooling system to force outside air into the  
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.  
Defrosters  
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place  
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to  
feel the air directed against the windshield.  
2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside  
the Vehicle  
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle  
Seat Belts  
Tires  
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,  
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced  
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.  
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear  
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects  
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall  
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-  
ing spare) for proper pressure.  
Safety belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if  
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,  
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor  
condition, replace the belt.  
Lights  
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights  
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high  
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.  
Airbag Light  
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to  
8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition  
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb is not lit  
during starting, have it replaced. If the light stays on or  
comes on while driving, have the system checked by an  
authorized dealer.  
Fluid Leaks  
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,  
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are  
present, the cause should be corrected immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
3
Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Outside Mirror — Drivers Side . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Outside Mirror — Passengers Side . . . . . . . . . .56  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
50 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Automatic Headlights—If Equipped . . . . . . . . .65  
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Headlight Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Flash To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Traction Control— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
Using Speed Control On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .73  
“Rolling Code” Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Reprogramming A Single Button . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Opening Sunroof - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Closing Sunroof - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 51  
Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CONSOLE FEATURES  
The center console/ armrest has a pencil / tire gage holder  
and a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the  
cover. The bottom of the console bin also has built in  
holders for compact discs or cassette tapes. There are also  
two cup holders for rear seat passengers located directly  
in the back of the center console.  
Console Features — Without Heated Seats  
Two coin holders are located toward the front of the  
inside of the console bin. The right side coin holder can  
accommodate dimes, nickels or pennies, while the left  
side coin holder can hold quarters, dimes, nickels, or  
pennies. Both can also accommodate various combina-  
tions of different types of coins, including some interna-  
tional currencies. The slot on the far left side is not for  
coins, but for an optional power outlet, if so equipped.  
Console  
The front console has two cup holders in the front and a  
storage bin. An optional removable ashtray may be  
located in the drivers side cup holder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 53  
Console Features — With Heated Seats  
The center console/ armrest has a pencil / tire gage holder  
and a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the  
cover. The bottom of the console bin also has built in  
holders for compact discs or cassette tapes. The power  
outlet is also mounted inside the center console (if  
equipped). There are also two cup holders for rear seat  
passengers and a rear courtesy lamp located directly in  
back of the center console.  
3
Two coin holders are located toward the front of the  
inside of the console bin. The right side coin holder can  
accommodate dimes, nickels or pennies, while the left  
side coin holder can hold quarters, dimes, nickels, or  
pennies. Both can also accommodate various combina-  
tions of different types of coins, including some interna-  
tional currencies.  
Console  
The front console has two cup holders. An optional  
removable ashtray may be located in the drivers side cup  
holder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
54 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
MIRRORS  
Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped  
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-  
light glare from vehicles behind you. Push in the button  
on the face of the mirror to activate the dimming feature.  
Inside Day/Night Mirror— If Equipped  
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear  
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal  
and vertical mirror adjustment.  
Automatic Dimming Mirror  
Adjusting Rearview Mirror  
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the  
small control under the mirror to the night position  
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted  
while set in the day position (toward windshield).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 55  
CAUTION!  
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,  
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the  
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and  
wipe the mirror clean.  
3
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors— If Equipped  
Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the  
remote controls mounted on the instrument panel to the  
left of the steering wheel.  
Power Mirror Controls  
NOTE: Place the mirror selector switch in the center  
(neutral) position to prevent accidental movement of the  
mirrors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
56 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side  
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped  
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of  
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the  
inside mirror.  
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use  
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the  
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-  
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.  
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side  
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the  
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the  
vehicle.  
WARNING!  
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side  
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away  
than they really are. Relying too much on your right  
side mirror could cause you to collide with another  
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when  
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this  
convex mirror.  
Illuminated Vanity Mirror  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57  
SEATS  
Reclining Bucket Seats  
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,  
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean  
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean  
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its  
normal position.  
Manual Front Seat Adjustments  
Forward/Rearward  
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the  
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired  
position.  
3
WARNING!  
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat  
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt  
might not be properly adjusted and you could be  
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is  
parked.  
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the  
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your  
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat  
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use  
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.  
Manual Seat Adjuster  
After releasing the adjusting bar, apply forward and  
rearward body pressure to be sure the seat is latched.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
58 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Lumbar Support — If Equipped  
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the  
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located  
on the inboard side of the drivers seatback. Turn the  
control lever forward to increase and rearward to de-  
crease the desired amount of lumbar support.  
Power Seats — If Equipped  
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the  
seat near the floor. Use the front switch to move the seat  
up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The rear  
switch controls the seatback recliner.  
Power Seat Switches  
CAUTION!  
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may  
cause damage to the seat controls.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 59  
Heated Seats — If Equipped  
WARNING!  
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin  
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,  
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-  
tion or other physical condition must exercise care  
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even  
at low temperatures, especially if used for long  
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat  
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or  
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.  
3
Heated Seat Switches  
The left rotary switch controls the heat level for the  
drivers seat, and the right rotary switch controls the heat  
level for the passengers seat. These switches feature  
several heat settings ranging from 0 to 6.  
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats on  
models equipped with leather seats. The controls for the  
heated seats are located in the floor console next to the  
parking brake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Adjustable Head Restraints  
Folding Rear Seat  
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in  
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraints so  
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise, pull  
up on the head restraint. To lower, depress the button on  
the post guide and push down on the head restraint.  
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can  
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture  
to fold down either or both seatbacks.  
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position  
be sure the seat back is latched.  
Adjustable Head Restraint  
Folding Rear Seats  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61  
WARNING!  
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the  
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down  
position) should not be used as a play area by  
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could  
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should  
be seated and using the proper restraint system.  
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD  
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull  
the hood release lever located under the left side of the  
instrument panel.  
Hood Release Lever  
Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge  
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING!  
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when  
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.  
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches  
are fully latched before driving.  
LIGHTS  
Interior Lights  
The map/ courtesy lights come on when a door is opened  
and the panel lamp dimmer switch (located on the turn  
signal control stalk) is in any detent except fully counter-  
clockwise (dome lamp ON position) or fully clockwise  
(dome lamp OFF position). Rotating the panel dimmer  
switch fully counter-clockwise will turn on the lights.  
Turn the panel dimmer switch fully clockwise to prevent  
the lights from coming on when a door is opened.  
Hood Safety Catch  
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open  
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole  
marked “prop” on the underside of the hood.  
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to  
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the  
hood to ensure that both latches engage.  
NOTE: The interior lights have a “fade to off” feature.  
When the lights are turned off, they gradually “fade” off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63  
Dimmer Control  
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)  
Rotate the dimmer control to the ex-  
treme bottom full-circle position. The  
interior lights will remain off when the  
doors are open.  
With the parking lights or headlights  
on, rotating the dimmer control for the  
interior lights on the Multi-Function  
Control Lever upward will increase  
the brightness of the instrument panel  
lights.  
3
Dome Light Position  
Rotate the dimmer control completely  
Daytime Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)  
Rotate the dimmer control to the first  
detent (full-circle). This feature bright-  
ens the odometer and radio display  
when the parking lights or headlights  
are on during daylight conditions.  
upward to the second detent to turn  
on the interior lights. The interior  
lights will remain on when the dim-  
mer control is in this position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped  
These lights are mounted between the sun visors. Each  
light has a push-on push-off switch.  
Multi-Function Control Lever  
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is  
pressed a second time, so be sure that they have been  
turned off before leaving the vehicle.  
Multi-Function Lever  
The Multi-Function lever controls the operation of the  
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam select switch,  
instrument panel light dimming, courtesy lights, passing  
lights, dome light and fog lights.  
Front Map/Reading Light Switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65  
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel  
Lights  
Turn the end of the Multi-Function lever to the first  
detent for parking light operation. Turn to the second  
detent for headlight operation.  
the courtesy lights. Turning the dimmer control to the full  
down position prevents the courtesy lights from coming  
on when a door is opened.  
Automatic Headlights—If Equipped  
This system automatically turns your headlights on at a  
preset level of outdoor lighting. Turn the end of the  
control lever to the third detent to turn the system on.  
When the system is on, the headlight delay feature is also  
on. This means that your headlights will stay on for about  
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch off. To turn  
the Automatic system off, turn the control lever clock-  
wise, to the off position.  
3
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-  
lights will come on in the automatic mode.  
NOTE: The Automatic Headlight System will turn on  
the headlights if it detects that the windshield wipers  
have been in operation for more than 10 seconds.  
Multi-Function Lever  
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,  
turn the center portion of the lever up or down. Turning  
the dimmer control to the full up position also turns on  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)  
Turn Signals  
The headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever  
the ignition switch is turned on. The lights remain on  
until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking  
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for  
normal night time driving.  
Move the turn signal lever up or down and the arrows in  
the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of  
the front and rear turn signal lights. You can signal a lane  
change by moving the lever partially up or down.  
Headlight Beam Select Switch  
Lights-on Reminder  
Pull the turn signal lever towards you to switch the  
headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the turn signal lever a  
second time to switch the headlights to LOW beam.  
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition  
is turned off, a chime will sound when the drivers door  
is opened.  
Flash to Pass  
Fog Lights — If Equipped  
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by  
lightly pulling the turn signal lever toward the steering  
wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high  
beam and remain on until the lever is released.  
The fog light switch is in the multi-function lever.  
To activate the fog lights, turn on the low beam  
headlights and pull out the end of the control  
lever. A light in the instrument cluster shows when the  
fog lights are on.  
Headlight Time Delay  
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination  
for about 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an  
unlighted area.  
NOTE: The switch will turn on the fog lights only if the  
low beam headlights are on. Turning on the high beam  
headlights turns off the fog lights.  
To activate the delay, turn off the ignition while the  
headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights. The  
delay interval begins when the ignition is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67  
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they  
will turn off in the normal manner.  
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF  
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.  
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold  
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the  
delay range, the wiper will operate for several cycles  
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermit-  
tent interval previously selected.  
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS  
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the  
right side control lever. Turn the end of the control lever  
to select the desired wiper speed.  
3
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers  
will operate for several cycles, then turn OFF.  
WARNING!  
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield  
could lead to an accident. You might not see other  
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of  
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the  
windshield with defroster before and during wind-  
shield washer use.  
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control  
NOTE: Always remove any build-up of snow that  
prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to  
the OFF position. If the windshield wiper switch is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Mist  
TILT STEERING COLUMN  
Use this feature when weather conditions make occa-  
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and  
release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.  
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn  
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as  
desired. Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly  
in place.  
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System  
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions  
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-  
tween cycles, desirable. Turn the lever to the delay  
position, then select the delay interval. The delay can be  
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds  
between cycles, to a cycle every 1/ 2 second.  
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.  
If the vehicle is moving less than 16 km/ h (10 mph),  
delay times will be doubled.  
Tilt Steering Column Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69  
WARNING!  
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-  
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have  
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-  
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.  
3
TRACTION CONTROL— IF EQUIPPED  
To turn the Traction Control System Off, press  
the switch located on the top of the steering  
column, to the right of the hazard switch, until  
the Traction Control indicator in the instrument  
cluster lights up.  
Traction Control Switch  
To turn the Traction Control System On, press the switch  
until the Traction Control indicator in the instrument  
cluster turns off.  
NOTE: The Traction Control System is enabled each  
time the ignition switch is turned On. This will occur  
even if you used the switch to turn the system off before  
powering down or turning the ignition to Lock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL— IF EQUIPPED  
When engaged, this device will control the throttle op-  
eration to maintain a constant vehicle speed between 30  
mph (48 km/ h) and 85 mph (137 km/ h). The controls are  
on the steering wheel.  
in use. The CRUISE Indicator in the instrument cluster  
will light up when the Speed Control is ON.  
NOTE: You must press the ON button to activate the  
system each time the engine is started.  
WARNING!  
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system ON  
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally  
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.  
You could lose control and have an accident. Always  
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.  
To Set At A Desired Speed:  
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed and the  
system is ON, press and release the SET button. Release  
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected  
speed. The speed control is now Engaged.  
Speed Control Switches  
To Activate:  
Press the ON/ OFF switch to turn the speed control  
system ON. To turn the system OFF, press the ON/ OFF  
switch again. The system should be turned OFF when not  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71  
To Deactivate:  
To decrease speed while speed control is Engaged, press  
and hold the COAST button. Releasing the button when  
the desired speed is reached, will establish a new SET  
speed.  
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL  
button, or normal brake or clutch pressure will deactivate  
speed control without erasing the memory. Pushing the  
ON/ OFF button or turning off the ignition turns the  
speed control system off and erases the memory.  
Tapping the COAST button once will result in a 1 mph  
(1.6 km/ h) decrease in the SET speed. Each time the  
button is tapped, the SET speed decreases. For example,  
tapping the button three times will decrease speed by 3  
mph (5 km/ h).  
3
To Resume Speed:  
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the  
RESUME/ ACCEL button. Resume can be used at any  
speed above 25 mph (40 km/ h).  
To Accelerate For Passing:  
To Vary The Speed Setting:  
NOTE: If the set speed is exceeded by 20 mph (32  
km/ h) or more during the acceleration, the set speed will  
have to manually re-engaged.  
When the speed control is Engaged (actively controlling  
to a SET speed), speed can be increased by pressing and  
holding the RESUME/ ACCEL button. When the button  
is released, a new set speed will be established.  
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the  
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the SET speed.  
Tapping the RESUME/ ACCEL button once will result in  
a 2 mph (3 km/ h) increase in the SET speed. Each time  
the button is tapped, the SET speed increases. For ex-  
ample tapping the button three times will increase speed  
by 6 mph (10 km/ h), etc.  
Using Speed Control On Hills  
Vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with  
Interactive Speed Control. This feature operates when  
travelling up or down hills with the Speed Control  
engaged and the drivers foot off of the accelerator.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
When Climbing A Hill  
Rolling Hills  
If vehicle speed drops 3 mph (5 km/ h) below the Speed  
Control set speed, the transaxle will downshift to third  
gear. Under severe conditions the transaxle may down-  
shift again to second gear. The transaxle will upshift to  
fourth gear after the vehicle has reached the top of the  
hill.  
The transaxle may downshift into third gear and remain  
there as the vehicle travels over rolling hills. The trans-  
axle will upshift into fourth gear when the road flattens  
out.  
The transaxle will resume its normal shift schedule if you  
depress the accelerator pedal during any of the above  
conditions.  
When Descending A Hill  
If vehicle speed rises 3 mph (5 km/ h) over the Speed  
Control set speed, the transaxle will downshift to third  
gear. This provides engine braking to keep vehicle speed  
under control. The transaxle will not downshift below  
third gear to control vehicle overspeed. The transaxle will  
upshift to fourth gear after the vehicle has reached the  
bottom of the hill.  
WARNING!  
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system  
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could  
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose  
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use  
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are  
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.  
NOTE: On very steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain  
may occur. It may be preferable to drive without Speed  
Control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73  
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED  
The HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver replaces up to  
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-  
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized  
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the  
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off  
your vehicles battery and charging system; no batteries  
are needed.  
WARNING!  
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and  
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be  
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver  
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and  
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-  
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-  
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage  
door opener without these safety features it could  
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515  
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety  
information or assistance.  
3
Programming The Universal Transceiver  
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held  
transmitter before programming. If your garage door  
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an  
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight  
down.  
Homelink Buttons  
1. Turn off the engine.  
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–  
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons  
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three  
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its  
indicator light in view.  
WARNING!  
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-  
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while  
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-  
ous injury or death.  
WARNING!  
Your motorized door or gate will open and close  
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do  
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the  
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can  
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or  
damage to objects.  
Programming Universal Transceiver  
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter  
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do  
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.  
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two  
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the  
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).  
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may  
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed  
under Canadian Programming.  
NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program  
additional hand held transmitters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75  
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will  
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid  
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90  
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes  
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the  
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your  
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the  
Universal Transceiver.  
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,  
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the  
copying of your code.  
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”  
system:  
3
Check the owners manual for the device for mention  
of “Rolling Codes”.  
NOTE:  
If you do not successfully program the  
Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer-  
sal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator  
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,  
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.  
Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand  
held transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or  
call toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515,  
or on the internet at www.homelink.com.  
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code  
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow  
these instructions after completing the Programming  
portion of this text:  
“Rolling Code” Programming  
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to pro-  
gram the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or  
other device does not operate, and your device was  
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or  
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.  
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the  
following programming procedure quicker and easier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor  
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may  
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have  
difficulty in locating the training button, check your  
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on  
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.  
Your garage door opener should now recognize your  
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may  
now be programmed if this has not previously been  
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may  
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original  
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.  
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door  
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.  
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming  
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some  
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand  
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro-  
gramming  
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to  
start step 3.  
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and  
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press  
and release the button a second time to complete the  
training process. Some garage door openers may require  
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the  
training.  
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver  
button while you press and release the hand held trans-  
mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.  
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and  
then rapidly when the programming is successful.  
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener  
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to  
the garage door or gate motor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77  
Operation  
Security  
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal  
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins  
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal  
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also  
be used at any time.  
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.  
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold  
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to  
flash.  
3
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
Reprogramming A Single Button  
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be  
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been  
completed.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference that may be  
received including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after  
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to  
three inches away from the button to be trained.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.  
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to  
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights  
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.  
HomeLinkis a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,  
Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED  
The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun visors  
on the overhead console.  
WARNING!  
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in  
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-  
tended children, can become entrapped by the  
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof  
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious  
injury or death.  
In an accident, there is greater risk of being  
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You  
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always  
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all  
passengers are properly secured too.  
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-  
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or  
any object to project through the sunroof opening.  
Injury may result.  
Power Sunroof Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79  
Opening Sunroof - Manual  
Sunshade Operation  
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will  
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will  
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-  
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the  
sunroof.  
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the  
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.  
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is  
open.  
3
Wind Buffeting  
Opening Sunroof - Express  
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of  
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the  
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the  
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain  
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-  
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with  
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows  
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs  
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to  
minimize the buffeting.  
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof  
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof  
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called  
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any  
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.  
Closing Sunroof - Manual  
To Close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press  
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully  
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-  
roof travel at any point.  
Sunroof Maintenance  
Venting Sunroof - Express  
Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean  
Press and release the ЉVЉ button, and the sunroof will  
the glass panel.  
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  
Sunroof Fully Closed  
Press and hold the switch forward until the sunroof stops  
CAUTION!  
completely to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.  
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off  
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw  
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not  
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if  
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will  
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life  
and/or prevent engine starting.  
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,  
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the  
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-  
mittently and with greater caution.  
After the use of high power draw accessories, or  
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with  
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be  
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the  
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.  
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs  
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-  
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the  
power outlet can cause damage.  
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET  
The power outlet is located in the lower center of your  
instrument panel. If your vehicle is equipped with heated  
seats, a second power outlet is located inside the center  
console. All accessories connected to any outlet should be  
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
CONTENTS  
Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
4
Instrument Cluster Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Instrument Cluster Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Compass Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Cigar Lighter/ Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
To Set The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Changer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Operating Instructions — Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
82 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Radio Data System (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
AM/ FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Operating Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 104  
Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
FF/ Tune/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Tape CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83  
Loading The CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
FF/ Tune/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Program Button 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Program Button 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Scan Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
4
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
DVD/ GPS Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
6 Disc CD Changer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Number (ENS/ SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
CD Player — Single Disc In Radio . . . . . . . . . 126  
CD Player — 6 Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 128  
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
PTY Button ЉScanЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
PTY Button ЉSeekЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85  
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
86 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STANDARD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
88 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION  
There is an Anti-Lock Brake system malfunction or  
Traction Control system malfunction.  
1. Fuel Gauge  
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the  
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in  
the fuel tank.  
The system has been deactivated to prevent damage  
to the brake system due to overheated brake tem-  
peratures.  
2. Traction Control — If Equipped  
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may  
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction  
Control indicator. This is to prevent overheating of the  
brake system and is a normal condition. The system will  
remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have  
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn  
off the Traction Control indicator.  
This display indicator illuminates momentarily  
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first  
turned ON. The indicator will blink during an  
active traction event, but will remain solid  
when the system is deactivated or if a system malfunc-  
tion occurs.  
The Traction Control indicator will turn ON if:  
3. Cruise Light — If Equipped  
This light shows that the Speed Control System is ON.  
This light will also illuminate for a 5–second bulb check  
when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON  
position.  
The Traction Control system is in use.  
The Traction Control switch has been used to turn  
the system OFF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89  
4. Airbag Light  
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8  
8. Speedometer  
Shows the vehicle speed in miles-per-hour and  
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition  
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb does not  
come on during starting, have the bulb replaced. If the  
light stays on, or comes on while driving, have the  
system checked by an authorized dealer.  
kilometers-per-hour.  
9. Charging System Light  
This light shows the status of the electrical  
charging system. The light should come on  
briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain  
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or  
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicles  
electrical devices, such as the Fog Lights or Rear  
Defroster. If the Charging System Light remains on, it  
means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with  
the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI-  
ATELY. See your local authorized dealer.  
4
5. Tachometer  
The red area of the scale shows the maximum permissible  
engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear  
range. Before reaching the red area (over 6,500 rpm), ease  
up on the accelerator to prevent engine over speed.  
6. Turn Signal Indicators  
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn  
signal, when using the turn signal lever.  
10. Malfunction Indicator Light  
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic  
system called OBD that monitors engine and  
automatic transmission control systems. The  
light will illuminate as long as the key is in the ON  
position, prior to engine start up. Approximately 15  
seconds later the MIL may blink for 10 seconds then  
7. High Beam Indicator  
This light shows that the headlights are on high  
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the  
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or  
low beam.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
resume to full illumination. (See “EMISSIONS IN-  
SPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS” in  
the “MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE” section of  
your Owner Manual for more details). If the bulb does  
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON,  
have the condition checked promptly.  
12. Temperature Gauge  
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant  
temperature. Any reading within the normal  
range (approximately mid point on the scale)  
shows that the cooling system is operating properly.  
The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal  
temperature when driving in hot weather, up moun-  
tain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when  
towing a trailer.  
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap or  
poor fuel quality may illuminate the light after engine  
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on  
through several of your typical driving cycles. In most  
situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not  
require towing.  
If the pointer rises to the “H” mark, stop the vehicle and  
turn off the engine until the problem is corrected.  
There are steps that you can take to slow down an  
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is  
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to  
the cooling system and turning off the A/ C removes this  
heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to  
maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and the Fan  
control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a  
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat  
from the cooling system.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious  
conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or  
severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be  
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.  
11. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped  
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91  
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light  
This light warns of an overheated engine cool-  
ant condition.  
button a second time to return to the odometer. While in  
trip mode, press and hold the button for at least 12 second  
to reset the trip odometer.  
Door, Deck or Trunk Ajar Warnings  
14. Transmission Range Indicator  
This indicator illuminates to show the automatic trans-  
mission gear selection.  
If you move the vehicle and a door is not completely  
closed, the word DOOR will replace the odometer dis-  
play and a chime will sound once. The odometer display  
will reappear when the door is closed. If the trunk is not  
completely closed, the word DECK will replace the  
odometer display. The odometer display will reappear  
when the trunk is closed.  
4
An optional AutoStick Gear Indicator displays the current  
transaxle gear when in AutoStick mode.  
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer  
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has  
been driven.  
16. Anti-Lock Warning Light — If Equipped  
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System  
described elsewhere in this manual. This light  
will come on when the ignition key is turned to the  
RUN position and may stay on for several seconds. If  
the light does not come on, have the system checked  
by an authorized dealer. The warning light should be  
checked frequently to assure that it is operating prop-  
erly.  
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of  
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the  
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-  
fore, if the odometer reading is changed, during repair or  
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading  
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can  
be determined.  
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To  
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release  
the Trip Odometer button. Press and release the Trip  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
92 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,  
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system  
is not functioning and that service is required, however,  
the conventional brake system will continue to operate  
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not  
on.  
18. Brake System Warning Light  
This light monitors both the brake fluid level  
and the parking brake. If the light comes on,  
it indicates either that the parking brake is  
on or there is a low fluid level in the brake  
master cylinder. On vehicles equipped with Anti-lock  
brakes (ABS), the brake light may also indicate re-  
duced braking performance.  
17. Oil Pressure Light  
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will  
come on and remain on briefly when the igni-  
tion is turned on as a bulb check. If the bulb does not  
come on during starting, have the bulb repaired  
promptly.  
If the parking brake is off and the light remains on, have  
the brake system inspected as soon as possible.  
WARNING!  
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop  
the vehicle and shut off the engine. Do not operate the  
vehicle until the cause is corrected.  
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-  
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance  
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.  
You could have an accident. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately.  
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.  
This can be determined using the procedure shown in  
Section 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93  
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure  
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the  
RUN position. (Refer to “A Word About Your Keys,  
Ignition Key Removal” in this manual for an illustration  
of the ignition positions.) The light should come on. If the  
light does not come on, have the system checked by an  
authorized dealer.  
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb  
check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains  
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or  
remain on continuously. Refer to ЉEnhanced Driver  
Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)Љ in the Occu-  
pant Restraints section for more information.  
20. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped  
4
The light will also come on when the parking brake is  
applied with the ignition in the RUN position.  
The light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for  
15 seconds. This shows that the system is arming. If the  
light comes on but does not flash, the system is still  
armed, but there is a problem in the trunk circuit. After 15  
seconds the light will continue to flash slowly. This  
shows that the system is fully armed.  
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is  
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.  
In an ABS equipped vehicle, the Brake System Warning  
light will come on if the ABS light is not functioning or if  
the ABS system is not communicating.  
21. Low Fuel Light  
When the fuel level drops to about 2 12 gallons (9  
1
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light  
2
liters), the fuel symbol will light and remain lit  
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this  
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb  
check. During the bulb check, if the drivers seat  
until fuel is added.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
94 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
COMPASS, TEMPERATURE, AND TRIP  
COMPUTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED  
Reset  
The following trip conditions can be reset:  
AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)  
ODO  
ET  
To reset only the trip condition currently displayed, press  
and release the STEP and US/ M buttons simultaneously  
until a chime sounds. To reset all trip conditions, hold  
down the STEP and US/ M buttons simultaneously  
(about 2 seconds) until a second chime sounds and then  
release the buttons.  
NOTE: The screen must display one of the trip condi-  
tions above in order to reset either (or all) of these  
conditions.  
Trip Computer Display  
This feature allows you to choose between a compass /  
temperature display and one of five trip conditions being  
monitored.  
US / M Button  
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric  
measurement units.  
Control Buttons  
Step Button  
Use this button to choose or cycle through the five trip  
conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95  
Trip Conditions  
Compass Temperature Display  
This display provides the outside temperature and one of  
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the  
vehicle is facing.  
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)  
This display shows the average fuel economy since the  
last reset.  
Estimated Range (DTE)  
WARNING!  
This display shows the estimated distance that can be  
traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This esti-  
mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa-  
tion: (Average Fuel Economy) x (Fuel Remaining)  
4
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above  
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly  
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such  
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-  
sonal injury or property damage.  
This display cannot be reset.  
Present Fuel Economy (ECO)  
This display shows fuel economy for the last few sec-  
onds.  
Compass Calibration  
The Automatic Compass Calibration feature eliminates  
the need for the operator intervention under normal  
conditions. If the CAL indicator is lit, the compass needs  
to be calibrated. A good calibration requires a level  
surface and an environment free of large metal objects  
such as large buildings, bridges, underground cables,  
railroad tracks, etc.  
This display cannot be reset.  
Trip Odometer (ODO)  
This display shows the distance traveled since the last  
reset.  
Elapsed Time (ET)  
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time  
since the last reset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
96 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Automatic Compass Calibration  
When the CAL indicator goes off, the compass is cali-  
brated and should display correct headings. Verify  
proper calibration by checking North (N), South (S), East  
(E), and West (W). If the compass does not appear  
accurate, repeat the calibration procedure in another area.  
The self-calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the  
need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions.  
During a short initial period, the compass may appear  
erratic and the CAL symbol will appear on the display.  
After the vehicle has completed at least one complete  
circle in an area free from large metal objects, calibration  
will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished.  
Compass Variance  
Variance is the difference between magnetic North and  
geographic North. For proper compass function, the  
correct variance zone must be set.  
After initial calibration, the compass will continue to  
automatically update this calibration whenever the ve-  
hicle is in motion.  
Setting the Compass Variance  
Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari-  
ance zone. To check the variance zone, the ignition must  
be on and the compass / temperature displayed. Hold  
down both the US / M and STEP buttons simultaneously  
until the VAR symbol is lit and then immediately release  
both buttons. The current variance zone will now be  
displayed. To change the zone, press the STEP button  
until the correct zone is displayed. Wait for about 5  
seconds. The trip computer will store this variance in  
memory and the compass will resume normal operation.  
Manual Compass Calibration  
Compass calibration can also be requested. To manually  
calibrate the compass, use the STEP button to step to the  
compass/ temperature display and then hold down both  
the STEP and US/ M buttons simultaneously until the  
CAL symbol is displayed. Release the buttons once the  
CAL symbol appears. Manual compass calibration has  
been initiated at this point. Drive the vehicle in circles in  
an area free from large metal objects until the CAL  
symbol is extinguished.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97  
Outside Temperature  
If the outside temperature is more than 131°F (55°C), the  
display will show 131°F. When the outside temperature is  
less than Ϫ40°F (Ϫ40°C), the display will show Ϫ40°F/ C.  
CIGAR LIGHTER/ASHTRAY  
For a nominal charge your dealer can provide a “smok-  
ers” package. This package consists of a cigar lighter and  
an ashtray that utilizes one of the cup holders.  
4
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK  
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into  
the radio. A digital readout indicates the time in hours  
and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or  
ACC position. Whenever the radio is turned on, it first  
comes up on either tape, cd or radio, whichever was  
previously on, and will revert back to Time/ Clock after a  
few seconds. If Time/ Clock was not previously selected,  
the display will revert back to whichever was previously  
on after a few seconds, whether it was tape, cd or radio.  
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, pressing  
the Time button will cause the radio to display time for  
several seconds, then turn off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
98 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
To Set The Clock:  
Two Types of Signals  
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or  
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound  
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to  
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the  
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.  
1. Use a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the hour  
(H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio, The time setting  
will increase each time you press the button.  
2. Press any other button to exit from the clock setting  
mode. Or, it will exit the mode automatically if left alone  
for 5 or 6 seconds.  
Electrical Disturbances  
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during  
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,  
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They  
interfere very little with the frequency variations that  
carry the FM signal.  
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION  
Radio Broadcast Signals  
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under  
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car  
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-  
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to  
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help  
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-  
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or  
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-  
nals.  
AM Reception  
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception  
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines  
and neon signs.  
FM Reception  
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-  
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations  
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,  
which is the major feature of FM radio.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99  
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER  
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS  
Power Switch, Volume Control  
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the  
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The  
volume will be displayed and continuously updated  
while the button is pressed.  
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left  
side of your radio faceplate.  
Seek Button (Radio Mode)  
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next  
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the  
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding  
the button will by pass stations until you release the  
button.  
4
Tuning  
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or  
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,  
the radio will continue to tune until you release the  
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-  
ously updated while the button is pressed.  
RAZ Radio  
Operating Instructions — Radio  
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the  
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to  
operate the radio.  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The Radio Data System allows radio broadcasting sta-  
tions to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency  
which is added to the stereo signal. RDS was developed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
100 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
to give FM receivers user-friendly features, such as  
Program Service name (PS) and Program Type (PTY).  
Program Service name is typically used by the broad-  
caster to display the stations name or call letters, for  
example ЉWNICЉ. Typically these are 8 characters in  
length and are displayed by the radio for those stations  
which are broadcasting this information. PTY (Program  
Type) is used to characterize the stations program ma-  
terial, for example ЉRock MusicЉ.  
Program Type  
Classic Rock  
Radio Display  
Cls Rock  
College  
College  
Country  
Inform  
Jazz  
Country  
Information  
Jazz  
Foreign Language  
News  
Language  
News  
Nostalgia  
Oldies  
Nostalga  
Oldies  
PTY (Program Type) Button  
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for  
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time  
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button  
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to  
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-  
cast PTY information.  
Personality  
Public  
Persnlty  
Public  
Rhythm and Blues  
Religious Music  
Religious Talk  
Rock  
R & B  
Rel Musc  
Rel Talk  
Rock  
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format  
types:  
Soft  
Soft  
Program Type  
Adult Hits  
Classical  
Radio Display  
Adlt Hit  
Classicl  
Soft Rock  
Soft Rhythm and Blues  
Sports  
Soft Rck  
Soft R&B  
Sports  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101  
Balance  
Program Type  
Radio Display  
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-  
ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the  
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be  
displayed and continuously updated while the button is  
turned.  
Talk  
Talk  
Top 40  
Top 40  
Weather  
Weather  
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is  
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency  
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY  
function only operates when in the FM mode.  
Fade  
4
The Fade control provides for balance between the front  
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.  
Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade  
will be displayed and continuously updated while the  
button is turned.  
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY  
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If  
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,  
the radio will return to the last preset station.  
Tone Control  
Slide the Bass and/ or Treble controls up or down to  
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass  
will be displayed and continuously updated while the  
slide is moved.  
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program  
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio  
will tune to the preset station.  
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop  
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a  
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the  
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.  
AM/FM Selection  
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The  
operating mode will be displayed next to the station  
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo  
station is received.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
102 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Scan Button  
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM  
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the  
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-  
button twice.  
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for  
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5  
seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the  
next.  
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode  
Press the Time button to change the display between  
radio frequency and time.  
Pressing the AM/ FM button continues the search in the  
alternate frequency band.  
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.  
Operating Instructions — Tape Player  
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the  
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently  
pull the cassette into the play position.  
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory  
When you are receiving a station that you wish to  
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.  
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the  
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press  
and release that button. If a station is not selected within  
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will  
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button  
memory.  
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,  
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm  
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may  
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and  
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.  
Seek Button  
You may add a second station to each push-button by  
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press  
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display  
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in  
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the  
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current  
selection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103  
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track  
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.  
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to  
move 2 selections, etc.  
Scan Button  
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.  
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.  
Changing Tape Direction  
Fast Forward (FF)  
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side  
being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in  
the display window will show the new direction.  
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape  
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance  
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is  
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the  
opposite direction.  
4
Metal Tape Selection  
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the  
player will automatically select the correct equalization  
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.  
Rewind (RW)  
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape  
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed  
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of  
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.  
Pinch Roller Release  
If ignition power or the radio ON/ OFF switch are turned  
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect  
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the  
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage  
and the tape will resume play.  
Tape Eject  
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage  
and eject from the radio.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Noise Reduction  
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the  
CAUTION!  
tape player is on, but may be switched off.  
3
This CD player will accept 4 4 inch (12 cm) discs  
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the  
CD player mechanism.  
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the  
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR  
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is  
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each  
time a tape is inserted.  
Inserting The Compact Disc  
The CD player contained within the radio is not a  
multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently  
insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing  
up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD  
Player.  
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license  
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby  
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-  
ratories Licensing Corporation.  
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from  
radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will  
show the track number and index time in minutes and  
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.  
Operating Instructions — CD Player  
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC  
position and the volume control ON before the CD player  
will operate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105  
NOTE:  
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.  
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition  
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a  
disc with the radio OFF.  
FF/TUNE/RW  
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to  
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)  
button works in a similar manner.  
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio  
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD  
Player and the display will show the time of day. If  
you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will  
show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.  
Program Button 4 (Random Play)  
4
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate  
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the se-  
lected disc in random order to provide an interesting  
change of pace.  
Seek Button  
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on  
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the  
beginning of the current selection, or return to the  
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the  
first 10 seconds of the current selection.  
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly  
selected track.  
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press  
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward  
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will  
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.  
EJT CD (Eject) Button  
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to  
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the  
radio mode.  
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.  
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be  
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
106 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
MODE  
Scan Button  
Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,  
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.  
CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).  
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.  
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE  
button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will  
be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the  
current channel name and number will be displayed for  
five seconds. The current program type and channel  
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The  
current channel name and number will then be displayed  
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the  
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.  
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped  
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD  
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-  
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate  
this CD changer.  
Mode Button  
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until  
CD information appears on the display.  
Disc Up/Program Button 1  
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next  
available disc.  
Tape CD Button  
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape  
player.  
Disc Down/Program Button 5  
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the  
previous disc.  
Time Button  
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD  
playing time to time of day.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107  
Seek Button  
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the  
following warning symbols may appear on your display.  
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the  
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.  
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and  
hold the RW button for fast reverse.  
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed  
when the operating temperature is corrected or another  
MODE is selected.  
4
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and  
fast reverse are activated.  
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is  
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:  
Random Play (RND)  
Excessive vibration  
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the  
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of  
pace.  
Disc inserted upside down  
Damaged disc  
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second  
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.  
Water condensation on optics  
CD Diagnostic Indicators  
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may  
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or  
the player, and play will resume automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD  
CHANGER CAPABILITY  
Radio Operation  
Power/Volume Control  
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the  
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left  
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.  
side of your radio faceplate.  
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through  
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position  
to operate the radio.  
Electronic Volume Control  
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360  
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the  
volume control to the right increases the volume and to  
the left decreases it.  
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be  
set at the same volume level as last played.  
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,  
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition  
is ON.  
RBB Radio  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109  
Seek  
You may add a second station to each push-button by  
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press  
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display  
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in  
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM  
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The  
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by  
pressing the push-button twice.  
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next  
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the  
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The  
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you  
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass  
stations without stopping until you release it.  
4
Tune  
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or  
decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,  
the radio will continue to tune until the button is  
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-  
ously updated while the button is pushed.  
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding  
button number will be displayed.  
Audio  
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-  
ANCE, and FADE.  
To Set The Push-Button Memory  
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.  
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the  
Bass tones.  
When you are receiving a station that you wish to  
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.  
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.  
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station  
and press and release that button. If a button is not  
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,  
the station will continue to play but will not be locked  
into push-button memory.  
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be  
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or  
decrease the Treble tones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be  
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the  
sound level from the right or left side speakers.  
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)  
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for  
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if  
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each  
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop  
the search, press SCAN a second time.  
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be  
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the  
sound level between the front and rear speakers.  
Cassette Player Features  
With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can  
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.  
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit  
setting tone, balance, and fade.  
AM/FM Selection  
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or  
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),  
but only when the ignition and radio are on.  
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The  
operating mode will be displayed next to the station  
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo  
station is received in the FM mode.  
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin  
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the  
player.  
Mode Button  
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette  
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if  
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is  
selected “SAT” will appear in your radio display.  
Music Search  
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start  
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the  
next selection on the tape and down to return to the  
beginning of the current selection, or return to the  
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the  
Satellite or radio mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111  
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within  
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.  
SCAN Button (Cassette Mode)  
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will  
change the side of the tape being played.  
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music  
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automati-  
cally when a selection has been located.  
NR (Noise Reduction)  
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is  
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.  
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the  
display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn  
ON.  
Selective Music Search  
4
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track  
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.  
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to  
move 2 selections, etc.  
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license  
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby  
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-  
ratories Licensing Corporation.  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily  
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the direc-  
tional arrows appear on the display.  
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped  
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD  
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-  
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate  
this CD changer.  
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button  
again.  
Time Button  
Press the time button to toggle between station frequency  
and time of day.  
Mode Button  
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until  
CD information appears on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
112 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Push-Button  
SCAN Button (CD Mode)  
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1  
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a  
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently  
being played.  
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.  
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.  
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If  
Equipped)  
Seek Button  
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owners  
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the  
Manual.  
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.  
CD Diagnostic Indicators  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and  
hold the RW button for fast reverse.  
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may  
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or  
the player, and play will resume automatically.  
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and  
fast reverse are activated.  
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the  
following warning symbols may appear on your display.  
Random Play (RND)  
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.  
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the  
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of  
pace.  
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed  
when the operating temperature is corrected or another  
MODE is selected.  
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second  
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.  
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is  
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:  
Excessive vibration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113  
Disc inserted upside down  
Damaged disc  
Radio Operation  
Power/Volume Control  
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the  
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.  
Water condensation on optics  
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER  
CONTROLS  
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through  
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position  
to operate the radio.  
4
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left  
side of your radio faceplate.  
Seek  
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next  
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the  
button to seek up or the bottom to seek down. The radio  
will remain tuned to the new station until you make  
another selection. Holding the button in will bypass  
stations without stopping until you release it.  
Tune  
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or  
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,  
the radio will continue to tune until you release the  
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-  
ously updated while the button is pressed.  
RBK Radio  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
114 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory  
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.  
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the  
Bass tones.  
When you are receiving a station that you wish to  
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.  
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”  
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and  
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5  
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will  
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button  
memory.  
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be  
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or  
decrease the Treble tones.  
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be  
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the  
sound level from the right or left side speakers.  
You may add a second station to each push-button by  
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press  
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display  
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in  
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM  
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The  
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by  
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset  
button is used a corresponding button number will be  
displayed.  
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be  
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the  
sound level between the front and rear speakers.  
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit  
setting tone, balance, and fade.  
AM/FM Selection  
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The  
operating mode will be displayed next to the station  
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo  
station is received.  
Audio  
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-  
ANCE, and FADE.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115  
Time  
Inserting The Compact Disc  
Press the TIME button to change the display between  
radio frequency and time.  
CAUTION!  
General Information  
3
This CD player will accept 4 4 inch (12 cm) discs  
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with  
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the  
CD player mechanism.  
4
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,  
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion.  
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio  
OFF, the display will show the time of day.  
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD  
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The  
display will show the track number and index time in  
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track  
one.  
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the users authority to operate the equipment.  
CD Player Operation  
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC  
position and the volume control ON before the CD player  
will operate.  
Seek  
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on  
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
beginning of the current selection, or return to the  
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the  
first second of the current selection.  
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly  
selected track.  
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop  
Random Play.  
EJT — Eject  
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move  
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to  
the radio mode.  
Mode  
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the  
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the  
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if  
equipped) is selected “SAT” will appear in your radio  
display.  
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be  
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.  
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF  
(except on convertibles).  
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the  
Satellite mode.  
FF/TUNE/RW  
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to  
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)  
button works in a similar manner.  
Time  
Press the TIME button to change the display from  
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.  
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4  
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing  
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on  
the selected disc in random order to provide an interest-  
ing change of pace.  
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped  
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD  
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-  
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate  
this CD changer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117  
Mode Button  
Random Play (RND)  
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until  
CD information appears on the display.  
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the  
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of  
pace.  
Disc Up/Program Button 1  
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next  
available disc.  
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second  
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.  
4
Disc Down/Program Button 5  
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the  
previous disc.  
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If  
Equipped)  
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owners  
Manual.  
Seek Button  
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the  
CD Diagnostic Indicators  
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.  
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may  
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or  
the player, and play will resume automatically.  
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons  
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and  
hold the RW button for fast reverse.  
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the  
following warning symbols may appear on your display.  
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and  
fast reverse are activated.  
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed  
when the operating temperature is corrected or another  
MODE is selected.  
SALES CODE RB1—AM/FM STEREO RADIO  
WITH DVD/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM  
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is  
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:  
Excessive vibration  
Disc inserted upside down  
Damaged disc  
Water condensation on optics  
RB1 Radio  
The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-  
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a  
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navi-  
gation Users Manual” for detailed operating instruc-  
tions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119  
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD  
Changer option, you will not be able to use the Naviga-  
tion system and the CD Player simultaneously. Always  
remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another  
disc.  
6 DISC CD CHANGER — IF EQUIPPED  
The CD changer is located below the radio in the  
instrument panel. The changer plays only 4 4 inch (12  
4
3
cm) discs. The changer holds up to 6 discs. Each disc is  
loaded and ejected through a single slot in front of the  
changer. Each disc has a numbered button with an amber  
light above it which, when illuminated, indicates that a  
disc is loaded in that particular chamber.  
6 Disc CD Changer  
Loading the CD Changer  
When inserting the first CD into the changer if the radio  
is on, wait until the single slot is illuminated on both  
sides and simply insert the first disc.  
To insert additional CDs into the changer, the instructions  
follow:  
1. Select and press any numbered button without an  
illuminated light above it.  
2. Insert the CD while the light above the chosen button  
is flashing and the two lights on either side of the slot are  
illuminated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
3. Upon insertion, the CD will begin to play, and both the  
button light and the lights in the corner of the loading  
slot will illuminate.  
FF/TUNE/RW  
Press the FF (fast forward) button and the CD player will  
fast forward through the tracks until the button is re-  
leased. Press the RW (rewind) button and the CD player  
will reverse through the tracks until the button is re-  
leased.  
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CDs.  
The CD player will stop while additional CDs are loaded.  
Playing Discs  
Mode Button  
Press this button to toggle between radio and cd modes.  
The radio will show the CD number, the CD track  
number, and the Track Time Elapsed while the radio is in  
the CD mode. If more than one CD is loaded in the  
changer, the changer will automatically play the next disc  
after playing the last track of the current disc.  
Program Button 1  
Press this button to play the next available disc.  
Program Button 4 (Random Play)  
Seek Button  
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate  
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the  
current compact disc in random order to provide an  
interesting change of pace. The CD changer stays in the  
random play mode when changing to the next disc.  
Press the top of this button on the radio once to play the  
next track. Press the bottom of the button once to return  
to the beginning of the current track. Press the bottom of  
the button twice to play the previous track.  
NOTE: The changer will not random play between  
discs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121  
Press the top of the Seek button once to move to the next  
randomly selected track. Press the bottom of the Seek  
button to go back to the beginning of the track.  
If in the CD mode and the last CD is ejected, the radio  
will tune to the last station selected.  
Removing Discs from the CD Changer  
Press button 4 a second time to stop random play.  
If there is a single CD in the changer, press the EJT button  
and the CD will eject. If the CD is not removed within 15  
seconds, it will automatically reload into the CD changer.  
To eject additional CDs from the changer, first select the  
numbered button where the CD is located and then press  
the EJT button.  
Program Button 5  
Press this button to play the previous disc.  
4
Time Button  
Press this button to switch between time of day and CD  
track time.  
CD Changer Operation with the Changer Off  
The CD changer is able to load and eject discs with the  
ignition power off. However, while the ignition is off, one  
of the six numbered buttons must be pressed first.  
Changing Modes  
While in the radio mode, if a cassette is loaded, press the  
Mode button to switch to the tape mode. If a CD is  
loaded, press the Mode button to select the CD mode. If  
neither a tape nor CD is loaded, the radio will ignore the  
command.  
Inserting either a tape or CD automatically starts that  
mode of play.  
Pressing the AM/ FM button while in the tape or CD  
mode will select the radio mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED  
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification  
Number (ENS/SID)  
The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification Num-  
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio  
system. To access the ESN/ SID, refer to the following  
steps:  
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-  
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to  
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-  
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,  
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-  
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.  
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH and RBK Radios  
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and  
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depend-  
ing on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously  
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit  
ESN/ SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP  
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press  
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/ SID digits have  
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until  
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the  
ESN/ SID mode when any other button is pushed, the  
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any  
button was pushed.  
System Activation  
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the  
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site  
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-  
tion available when activating your system:  
1. The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification  
Number (ESN/ SID).  
2. Credit card information.  
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123  
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and  
RBQ Radios  
The current program type and channel number will  
then be displayed for 5 seconds.  
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and  
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons  
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/ SID num-  
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/ SID  
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is  
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button  
was pushed.  
The current channel number will then be displayed  
until an action occurs.  
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the  
Satellite radio mode.  
4
Selecting a Channel  
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for  
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up  
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the  
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until  
the button is released.  
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH and RBK  
Radios  
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ЉS AЉ appears in  
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while  
in the Satellite radio mode.  
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to  
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The  
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before  
moving on to the next channel. The word ЉSCANЉ will  
appear in the display between each channel change. Press  
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.  
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1  
and RBQ Radios  
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word  
ЉSIRIUSЉ appears in the display. These radios will also  
display the following:  
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel  
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.  
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable con-  
tent can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or  
unblocking. Please have your ESN/ SID information  
available.  
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory  
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory  
channel and stop the search.  
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels  
PTY Button ؆SEEK؆  
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you  
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button  
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not  
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the  
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.  
When the desired program is obtained, press the ЉSEEKЉ  
button within five seconds. The channel will change to  
the next channel that matches the program type selected.  
Satellite Antenna  
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the  
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to  
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).  
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the  
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-  
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward  
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not  
place items directly on or above the antenna.  
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button  
(If Equipped)  
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your  
radio.  
PTY Button ؆SCAN؆  
When the desired program type is obtained, press the  
ЉSCANЉ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7  
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next  
channel of the selected program type. Press the ЉSCANЉ  
button a second time to stop the search.  
Reception Quality  
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the  
following reasons.  
NOTE: Pressing the ЉSEEKЉ or ЉSCANЉ button while  
performing a music type scan will change the channel by  
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking  
structure or under a physical obstacle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125  
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the  
form of short audio mutes.  
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can  
cause intermittent reception.  
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can  
cause signal blockage.  
4
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF  
EQUIPPED  
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear  
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to  
access the switches.  
Remote Sound System Controls  
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a  
push-button in the center and controls the volume and  
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker  
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom  
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.  
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch  
between the various modes available (AM/ FM/ TAPE/  
CD, Etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a  
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand  
control is different depending on which mode you are in.  
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no  
function in this mode.  
CD Player — Single Disc in Radio  
The following describes the left hand control operation in  
each mode.  
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next  
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once  
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the  
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second  
after the current track begins to play.  
Radio Operation  
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next  
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch  
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.  
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the  
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.  
The button located in the center of the left hand control  
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-  
grammed in the radio preset push-button.  
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no  
function in this mode.  
Tape Player  
CD Player — 6 Disc CD Changer  
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next  
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the  
switch once will go to the beginning of the current  
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it  
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.  
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next  
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once  
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the  
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second  
after the current track begins to play.  
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the  
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.  
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the  
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127  
The button in the center of the left hand switch will cause  
the CD changer to play the next available disc.  
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The  
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from  
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were  
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should  
periodically clean the head with a commercially available  
WET cleaning cassette.  
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE  
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,  
take the following precautions:  
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,  
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-  
ished.  
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every  
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very  
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to  
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.  
4
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from  
slackness and dust when it is not in use.  
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE  
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the  
following precautions:  
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat  
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.  
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is  
tightly secured to the cassette.  
1. Handle the disc by its edge or center; avoid touching  
the surface.  
5. A loose tape should not be inserted into the radio.  
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,  
wiping from center to edge.  
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan  
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape  
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of  
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap  
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-  
ing the disc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,  
or antistatic sprays.  
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES  
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular  
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-  
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened  
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.  
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio  
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-  
sitioning of the cellular antenna, it is recommended that  
the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular  
phone operation.  
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.  
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.  
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become  
too high.  
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-  
lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft  
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before  
considering disc player service. You may have a problem  
with CD-R (recordable) and CD-RW (recordable and  
writable) disks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129  
CLIMATE CONTROLS  
near the windshield glass. The In-Car Temperature Sen-  
sor is mounted behind the ATC control panel. These  
sensors transmit data on sun strength and vehicle interior  
temperatures to enhance system performance.  
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If  
Equipped  
CAUTION!  
4
Do not cover either sensor with any foreign material  
as improper operation of the system will result.  
Automatic Temperature Controls  
Level Of Automatic Control  
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum  
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.  
The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in  
various weather conditions with a simple two step op-  
eration. Press the AUTO button and select your comfort  
setting. The system will automatically control comfort by  
varying temperature, fan speed, and Mode.  
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any  
time without affecting automatic control operation.  
You also may choose to customize your comfort by  
selecting the fan speed and Mode. This will place the  
system into manual operation  
The control also will show what Mode the system is in by  
the figure shown in the display.  
NOTE: The Mode can change when the system is in the  
Auto Mode. This will be indicated in changes in the  
display window. This shows automatic changes in air  
direction.  
Interior ATC Sensors  
There are two interior sensors in the vehicle. The Sun  
Sensor is mounted in the center of the instrument panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Fan Control  
61,....to 89,90, Hi, for automatic temperature control. You  
can select a very hot or cold comfort setting by holding  
the comfort control until it reaches its highest or lowest  
levels.  
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced  
through the system in any mode you select. Turn the  
control clockwise to increase fan speed.  
In ambient temperatures below 21°C (70°F), fan opera-  
tion is delayed when the engine is first started. The fan  
will automatically start when the engine coolant is warm  
enough to heat the air. This feature can be defeated by  
turning the fan control.  
The system adjusts to bring the interior temperature to  
the desired comfort level. All comfort settings are auto-  
matic; even Hi and Low.  
NOTE: You can change the display from U.S. to metric  
units by pressing the Mix and Panel mode buttons  
simultaneously or by pressing the English/ Metric button  
on the overhead console.  
NOTE: While in Automatic Temperature Control,  
changing the fan control position will switch control back  
into manual control.  
Air Conditioning Button  
AUTO Control  
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning  
compressor. A snow flake symbol in the display  
shows that the compressor is on. Compressor  
operation is automatic when you press the Auto button.  
Press the top of the button to turn the ATC system On.  
Press the lower portion of the button to turn the entire  
system Off.  
Comfort Control  
The compressor can operate at any temperature above  
32°F (0°C).  
Use this control to regulate the comfort inside the pas-  
senger compartment. Press the top of the switch to raise  
the temperature selection and the bottom of the switch to  
lower it. The comfort setting range is from Low, 60,  
With the compressor off and the temperature set at Lo, air  
entering the vehicle will be slightly warmer than the air  
outside the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131  
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine  
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in  
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-  
pressor is on. This is a normal occurrence since the  
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and  
improve fuel economy.  
you can not achieve comfort or visibility in Auto opera-  
tion. A symbol in the display window will show which  
mode is operating.  
Panel  
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-  
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct  
air flow. This mode is not recommended when heat is  
required.  
Recirculate Button  
4
Press this button to recirculate the air inside the  
vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering the  
vehicle. Recirculation is automatically controlled when  
the system is in Auto Mode. Use this mode to temporarily  
block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust.  
Floor  
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a  
lesser amount through the Defrost and side  
window demist outlets. This mode is recommended  
when heat is desired.  
Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel,  
Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or  
Defrost modes.  
Mix  
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and  
side window demist outlets. Use this setting in  
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat  
at the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining  
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.  
The compressor is on in this mode.  
NOTE: The Recirc button light will blink if you try to  
use it in the Mix or Defrost modes.  
Air Direction Buttons (Mode)  
These buttons allow you to select from five air distribu-  
tion patterns. These buttons should be used only when  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Bi-Level  
Rear Window Defroster  
Press the button once to turn on the Rear Window  
Defroster and a second time to turn it off. An  
indicator light in the control shows that the defroster is  
on.  
Air is directed through both the panel and floor  
outlets. This mode is not recommended when  
heat is required in very cold temperatures.  
NOTE: There is a varying difference in temperature  
between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort.  
The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature  
provides improved comfort during sunny but cool con-  
ditions.  
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 15  
minutes of operation. Each later activation will allow 7  
1/ 2 minutes of operation.  
Windshield Defrost  
CAUTION!  
Air is directed through the defrost outlets and  
side window demist outlets. A small amount of  
air also is directed through the floor outlets. Use this  
mode with maximum fan and comfort level settings  
for best windshield and side window defrosting. The  
defrost symbol will glow in amber to show that the  
defroster is on.  
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not  
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window  
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.  
Labels can be peeled off by soaking with warm  
water.  
Window Fogging  
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor is on in this  
mode. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-  
shield. To improve fuel economy, leave in the defrost  
mode only when necessary.  
In mild but rainy or humid weather, your windows may  
fog up on the inside. You can remove this fog by pressing  
the Defrost button. The Mix mode can be used to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133  
maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heat-  
ing. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase  
blower speed. The compressor will remain on during  
these conditions.  
Rear Seat Outlets  
These outlets are located under the front seats and direct  
warm air to the rear seat passengers. Air is directed  
through these outlets when you select either the Floor,  
Bi-Level, or Mix modes.  
NOTE: Do not use the recirculated air mode under  
these conditions as window fogging may occur.  
Outside Air Intake  
Make sure that the air intake directly in front of the  
windshield is free of obstructions. Leaves, snow, etc.,  
could block air flow into the vehicle.  
4
Hot Weather Automatic Recirculation  
The system will automatically recirculate the air inside  
the vehicle when the interior is very warm. This will  
provide maximum cooling. The system will also occa-  
sionally return to REC on hot, humid or very hot, dry  
days to maintain occupant comfort.  
NOTE: If you cannot get comfortable in the AUTO  
mode by adjusting the comfort set point up or down  
please refer to the Operating Tips chart (for ATC only) at  
the end of this section for suggested control settings in  
different weather conditions.  
Side Window Demisters  
Side window demisters are located on the instrument  
panel. These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the  
side windows in any mode except Panel or Panel Recir-  
culation. The air is directed toward the area of the side  
windows through which you view the outside rearview  
mirrors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Operating Tips (ATC only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135  
NOTE: If the system is in the AUTO mode and the fan  
control is already rotated fully clockwise or fully coun-  
terclockwise, the control may have to be rotated to the  
middle and then to the desired fan setting for manual  
adjustment of fan speed.  
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains  
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer  
in the upper atmosphere.  
The controls are as follows:  
Fan and Air Conditioning Control  
Use this control to regulate the  
amount of air forced through the sys-  
tem in any mode you select. The 0  
Setting represents OFF and the 4 Set-  
ting is the greatest amount of air flow.  
Manual Air Conditioning/Heater Control — If  
Equipped  
The Air Conditioning System allows you to balance the  
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating  
throughout the vehicle.  
4
Air Conditioning Operation  
To turn on the Air Conditioning,  
choose the direction of the air through  
the outlets by selecting between the  
Air Conditioning Recirculation, Panel-  
Air Conditioning, or Bi-Level Air Con-  
ditioning modes on the Mode Control.  
Air Conditioning modes are indicated  
by the snowflake symbol shown above in illustration.  
Adjust the Temperature and Fan Controls.  
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed  
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a  
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and  
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.  
Mode Control  
The mode control allows you to  
choose from several patterns of air  
distribution.  
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems  
lower than expected, check the front of the air condition-  
ing condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. The  
air conditioning condenser is located in front of the  
radiator. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the  
radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia  
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing  
air conditioning performance.  
Recirculation — Air Conditioning  
Recirculated interior air is cooled and sent  
through the instrument panel vents. Upon  
initial start up of the vehicle in very hot or  
humid weather, open windows and put in  
outside air modes to flush hot/ humid air out. Then  
turn on the Recirculation mode to cool the vehicle  
interior rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be  
used to temporarily block out any outside odors,  
smoke, or dust.  
Temperature Control  
Use this control to regulate the tem-  
perature of the air inside the passenger  
compartment. The blue area of the  
scale indicates cooler temperatures  
while the red area indicates warmer  
temperatures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137  
NOTE: Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may  
make the inside air stuffy and under mild, humid condi-  
tions cause windows to fog. Use of this mode for longer  
than 15 minutes is not recommended.  
Bi-Level  
Air is directed through the instrument panel  
and floor outlets.  
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the  
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer  
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved  
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.  
Panel — Air Conditioning  
Outside air flows through the air condition-  
ing system and then through the outlets  
located in the instrument panel.  
4
Floor  
Bi-Level — Air Conditioning  
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a  
lesser amount through the defrost and side  
window demist outlets.  
Outside air flows through the air condition-  
ing system and then through the outlets  
located in both the instrument panel and floor  
outlets.  
Mix  
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and  
side window demist outlets. This setting  
works best in cold or snowy conditions that  
require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is  
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-  
ture on the windshield.  
Panel  
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-  
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to  
direct air flow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Defrost  
Air is directed through the windshield and  
side window demist outlets. Use this mode  
with maximum fan and temperature settings for  
best windshield and side window defrosting.  
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 15  
minutes of operation. Each later activation will allow 10  
minutes of operation.  
Side Window Demisters  
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the  
instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air  
toward the side windows when the system is in either the  
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST modes. A small amount of air  
is directed to the side window demisters in BI-LEVEL  
mode as well. The air is directed at the area of the  
windows through which you view the outside mirrors.  
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in  
both Mix and Defrost modes even if the Air Conditioning  
is not selected. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the  
windshield.  
Rear Seat Outlets  
These outlets are located under the front seats and direct  
warm air to the rear seat passengers. Air is directed  
through these outlets when you select either the Floor,  
Bi-Level, or Mix modes.  
Windshield and Side Window Fogging  
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly  
removed by using the defrost position on the mode  
control.  
Rear Window Defroster  
The Rear Window Defroster button is located to  
the right of the Mode Control. Press this button  
once to turn on the Rear Window Defrost and a second  
time to turn them off. A light above the button shows that  
the defroster is on.  
Your side windows may fog on the inside in mild  
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows,  
select the Panel-Air Conditioning mode on the  
Mode Control. Point the panel outlets toward the side  
windows.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139  
NOTE: Do not use the recirculation mode as it will not  
Winter Operation  
clear windows under these conditions.  
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use  
only the low blower speeds for the first 10 minutes of  
operation. During engine warm up in cold weather, use  
the Defrost mode to direct any cold air away from vehicle  
occupants. Use of the Recirculate-Air Conditioning Mode  
during winter months is not recommended due to the  
possibility of window fogging.  
Summer Operation  
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-  
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion  
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for  
protection against overheating. A 50 % concentration is  
recommended.  
4
NOTE: See Operating Tips chart (for Manual A/ C  
Control) at the end of this section for suggested control  
settings in different weather conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Operating Tips (Manual A/C Control Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141  
Outside Air Intake  
Make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-  
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions  
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum  
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.  
4
Air Intake  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING  
CONTENTS  
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
5
(Below -20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Brake/ Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Traction Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
144 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 170  
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 171  
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Spark Knock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Flexible Fuel— (Fleet Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . 181  
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 145  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146 STARTING AND OPERATING  
STARTING PROCEDURES  
Automatic Transaxle  
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both  
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.  
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK  
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes  
before shifting to any driving gear.  
Normal Starting  
CAUTION!  
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does  
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.  
Simply turn the key to the “START’” position and release  
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started  
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal  
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start  
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,  
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting  
procedure.  
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high  
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera-  
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave  
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.  
WARNING!  
Do not leave children or animals inside parked  
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may  
cause serious injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 147  
CAUTION!  
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it  
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-  
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could  
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has  
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.  
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables  
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.  
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-  
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6  
of this manual for jump starting instructions.  
5
Ignition Key Positions  
WARNING!  
Extreme Cold Weather (below -20°F or -29°C)  
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an  
externally powered electric engine block heater and  
battery blanket heater package (available from your  
dealer) is recommended.  
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the  
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start  
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing  
serious personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
148 STARTING AND OPERATING  
If Engine Fails to Start  
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15  
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal  
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” or “EX-  
TREME COLD WEATHER” procedure should be re-  
peated.  
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the  
“NORMAL STARTING” or “EXTREME COLD  
WEATHER” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the  
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there  
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess  
fuel in case the engine is flooded.  
After Starting  
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine  
warms up. At cooler ambient temperatures, the idle  
speed for the 2.7L engine may increase during extended  
idles for improved heater performance.  
CAUTION!  
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the  
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to  
15 seconds before trying again.  
BATTERY AND ENGINE BLOCK HEATERS — If  
EQUIPPED  
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and  
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord  
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a  
grounded, three wire extension cord. The engine block  
heater cord is found under the hood near the air cleaner  
housing.  
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not  
have enough power to continue running when the key is  
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-  
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the  
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running  
smoothly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 149  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,  
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is  
running. Before exiting a vehicle you should shift  
the transmission into Park, remove the key from the  
ignition, and apply the park brake. Once the key is  
removed from the ignition the transmission shift  
lever is locked in the Park position, securing the  
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,  
you should never leave children unattended inside a  
vehicle. The following indicators should be used to  
ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift  
lever into the “Park” position:  
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.  
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could  
cause electrocution.  
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are  
expected to last for several days.  
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE  
Brake/Transmission Interlock  
This interlock system prevents you from moving the gear  
selector out of the Park position unless the brake pedal is  
pressed. The system is active when the ignition switch is  
in the RUN position.  
When shifting into Park, depress the button on  
the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the  
way forward until it stops.  
Look at the shift indicator window on the console  
to ensure it is in the “P” position.  
When engaged in Park you will not be able to  
move the shifter rearward without depressing the  
shift lever button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
150 STARTING AND OPERATING  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or  
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If  
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the  
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-  
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit  
someone or something. Only shift into gear when  
the engine is idling normally and when your right  
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.  
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following  
precautions are not observed:  
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to  
a complete stop.  
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the  
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the  
engine is at idle speed.  
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL  
into any forward gear when the engine is above  
idle speed.  
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System  
This system prevents the key from being removed unless  
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button  
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the  
key is in the OFF or RUN positions.  
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot  
is firmly on the brake pedal.  
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system may trap the  
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety  
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and  
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain  
service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 151  
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle  
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-  
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible  
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to  
determine if the problem could recur.  
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise  
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrat-  
ing; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be  
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and preci-  
sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.  
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.  
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic  
Transaxle  
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or  
Reset Mode  
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal  
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause  
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second  
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the  
forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral  
(N) will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the  
vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without  
damaging the transaxle.  
5
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.  
NOTE: If the key is in the RUN position, you must  
press the brake pedal to shift out of the “P” Park position.  
“P” Park  
Supplements parking by locking the transaxle. Engine  
can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK  
while vehicle is in motion.  
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the  
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.  
Apply parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this  
range.  
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).  
Turn the Key to LOCK then restart the engine.  
Shift into D and resume driving.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
152 STARTING AND OPERATING  
“D” Overdrive  
WARNING!  
This range should be used for most city and highway  
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts  
and best fuel economy.  
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if  
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to  
move the gearshift lever back and forth without  
depressing the shift button after you have set it in P.  
Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.  
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the  
Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle  
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-  
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy  
trailers), use the “3” range.  
WARNING!  
“3” Drive  
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle  
will operate normally in first and second while in this  
range.  
Never use the Park position as a substitute for the  
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully  
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and  
possible injury or damage.  
A delayed shift from second to third will occur at speeds  
of about 31 to 38 mph (50 to 60 km/ h) and low levels of  
accelerator pedal travel. An early down-shift from third  
to second will occur at a speed of about 34 to 30 mph (54  
to 48 km/ h). This is done to provide second gear engine  
braking at speeds less than 30 mph (48 km/ h).  
“R” Reverse  
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a  
complete stop.  
“N” Neutral  
Engine may be started in this range.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 153  
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle  
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-  
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc-  
ing excessive shifting and heat build up.  
PARKING BRAKE  
When the parking brake is applied with the  
ignition on, the brake light in the instrument  
cluster will come on.  
Use the “3” range when descending steep grades to  
prevent brake system distress.  
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is  
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.  
“L” Low  
This range should be used for maximum engine braking  
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts  
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down  
shifts occur as early as possible.  
5
WARNING!  
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-  
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always  
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard  
against vehicle movement and possible injury or  
damage.  
Parking Brake  
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking  
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on  
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
154 STARTING AND OPERATING  
To release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal and  
pull up on the parking brake lever. Push the release  
button and lower the lever fully.  
WARNING!  
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-  
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others  
could be injured. Children should be warned not  
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.  
Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could  
operate power windows, other controls, or move  
the vehicle.  
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking  
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise  
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it  
difficult to move the selector out of Park. As an added  
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a  
downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill  
grade.  
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged  
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake  
failure and an accident.  
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-  
ing the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 155  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-  
bility, the remaining system will still function with some  
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident  
by increased pedal travel during application and greater  
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the  
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake  
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning  
indicator will light.  
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as  
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for  
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications  
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The  
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater  
than that required with the power system operating.  
WARNING!  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped  
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake  
performance under most braking conditions. The system  
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking  
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.  
5
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting  
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and  
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full  
braking capacity in an emergency.  
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and  
tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate  
signals for the ABS computer. However, the system will  
compensate when the compact spare is in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
156 STARTING AND OPERATING  
During stops where ABS is activated, a vibration of the  
brake pedal may be felt and associated system noises  
may be heard.  
WARNING!  
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-  
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor  
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-  
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle  
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.  
WARNING!  
Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the effec-  
tiveness of Anti-lock brakes and may lead to an  
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance  
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when  
you need to slow down or stop.  
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including  
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,  
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-  
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver  
can prevent accidents.  
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must  
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety  
or the safety of others.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 157  
POWER STEERING  
The power assisted steering system of your vehicle  
provides mechanical steering capability in the event  
power assist is lost.  
If for some reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted,  
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these  
conditions you will observe a substantial increase in  
steering effort.  
5
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED  
The Traction Control System will improve acceleration  
and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire spin.  
The system reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at  
the driving (front) wheels by engaging the brake on the  
wheel that is losing traction. When this occurs the  
traction control indicator light located in the instrument  
cluster will flash. The system operates at speeds below 35  
mph (56 km/ h).  
Traction Control Switch  
A push-button located on the top of the steering column  
turns the Traction Control System ON or OFF.  
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:  
The traction control switch has been used to turn the  
system off;  
There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;  
There is a Traction Control System malfunction;  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
158 STARTING AND OPERATING  
The system has been automatically deactivated to  
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated  
brake temperatures.  
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION  
Tire Markings  
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may  
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the traction  
control light located in the instrument cluster.  
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is  
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for  
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system  
will automatically reactivate and turn off the traction  
control light.  
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn  
the Traction Control System Off before attempting to  
“rock” the vehicle free.  
NOTE:  
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design  
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded  
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-  
ample: P215/ 65R15 95H.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 159  
European Metric tire sizing is based on European  
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have  
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with  
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire  
size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H  
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact  
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.  
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”  
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-  
tion. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.  
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.  
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric  
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the  
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-  
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.  
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design  
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded  
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Sizing Chart  
EXAMPLE:  
Size Designation:  
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards  
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards  
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards  
T = Temporary Spare tire  
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)  
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)  
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)  
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.  
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)  
R = Construction Code  
ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.  
ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.  
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 161  
EXAMPLE:  
Service Description:  
95 = Load Index  
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.  
H = Speed Symbol  
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding  
to its load index under certain operating conditions.  
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-  
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and  
posted speed limits).  
5
Load Identification:  
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire  
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire  
Light Load = Light Load Tire  
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure  
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.  
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this  
tire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall  
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on  
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side  
of the tire.  
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire  
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires  
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including  
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.  
EXAMPLE:  
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301  
DOT = Department of Transportation  
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire  
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.  
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)  
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)  
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)  
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)  
—03 means the 3rd week.  
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)  
—01 means the year 2001.  
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in  
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 163  
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure  
Tire and Loading Information Placard  
Tire Placard Location  
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed  
on either the face of the drivers door or the drivers side  
Bpillar.  
5
Tire and Loading Information  
This placard tells you important information about  
the:  
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle  
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry  
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle  
Tire Placard Location  
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear  
and spare tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Loading  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed  
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You  
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you  
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire  
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading  
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on  
your vehicles placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and  
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-  
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.  
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,  
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear  
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on  
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the  
Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of  
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”  
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo  
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,  
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)  
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your  
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The  
combined weight of occupants, cargo/ luggage and  
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed  
the weight referenced here.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo  
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 165  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your  
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this reduces the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-  
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the  
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.  
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392  
Kg).  
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to  
calculate total load, cargo/ luggage and towing capacities  
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 167  
1. Safety—  
WARNING!  
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading  
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and  
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the  
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never  
overload them.  
WARNING!  
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can  
cause accidents.  
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can  
result in tire failure.  
Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion  
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause  
damage that results in tire failure.  
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION  
5
Tire Pressure  
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and  
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary  
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:  
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-  
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.  
Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect  
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle  
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right  
or left.  
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-  
mended cold tire inflation pressure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
168 STARTING AND OPERATING  
2. Economy—  
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear  
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal  
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for  
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire  
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.  
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—  
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.  
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.  
Tire Inflation Pressures  
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either  
the face of the drivers door or the drivers side “Bpillar.  
Tire Placard Location  
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as  
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least  
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to  
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement  
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look  
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.  
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure  
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the  
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-  
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure  
Information” section of this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 169  
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the  
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire  
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),  
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this  
outside temperature condition.  
CAUTION!  
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-  
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This  
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the  
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.  
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)  
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure  
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.  
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always  
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure  
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not  
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile  
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation  
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-  
sure molded into the tire side wall.  
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation  
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds  
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-  
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very  
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle  
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-  
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading  
and cold tire inflation pressures.  
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range  
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with  
temperature changes.  
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per  
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind  
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in  
the winter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
170 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in  
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your  
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.  
WARNING!  
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-  
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your  
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a  
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the  
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75  
mph (120 km/h).  
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped  
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with  
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style  
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the  
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-  
stalled at the first opportunity.  
Radial-Ply Tires  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use  
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph  
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited  
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear  
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be  
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which  
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in  
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.  
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires  
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle  
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-  
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case  
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine  
them with other types of tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 171  
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a  
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the  
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.  
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your  
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare  
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,  
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the  
vehicle at the first opportunity.  
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/ wheel  
on the vehicle at any given time.  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use  
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects  
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more  
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold  
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire  
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.  
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first  
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure  
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.  
5
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take  
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the  
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may  
result.  
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped  
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use  
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use  
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare  
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
172 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Tire Spinning  
Tread Wear Indicators  
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not  
spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/ h).  
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires  
to help you in determining when your tires should be  
replaced.  
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section  
6 of this manual.  
WARNING!  
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-  
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-  
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure  
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster  
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And  
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter  
what the speed.  
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread  
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth  
becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the  
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.  
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this  
point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 173  
Life of Tire  
Replacement Tires  
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying  
factors including but not limited to:  
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many  
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for  
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-  
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-  
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance  
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread  
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The  
service description and load identification will be found  
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent  
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-  
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you  
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire  
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-  
cations or capability.  
Driving style  
Tire pressure  
Distance driven  
5
WARNING!  
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six  
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to  
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.  
You could lose control and have an accident result-  
ing in serious injury or death.  
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little  
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact  
with oil, grease and gasoline.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
174 STARTING AND OPERATING  
WARNING!  
CAUTION!  
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than  
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size  
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-  
ings.  
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-  
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change  
suspension dimensions and performance charac-  
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-  
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause  
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and  
suspension components. You could lose control  
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or  
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load  
ratings approved for your vehicle.  
Alignment And Balance  
Poor suspension alignment may result in:  
Fast tire wear.  
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided  
wear.  
Vehicle pull to right or left.  
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or  
capacity, other than what was originally equipped  
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load  
index could result in tire overloading and failure.  
You could lose control and have an accident.  
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.  
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer  
for proper diagnosis.  
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.  
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-  
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and  
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.  
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having  
adequate speed capability can result in sudden  
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 175  
TIRE CHAINS  
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-  
mended.  
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what  
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should  
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph  
(120 km/ h).  
CAUTION!  
Tire Rotation Recommendations  
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at  
different loads and perform different steering, driving  
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at  
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-  
terns.  
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are  
used.  
5
SNOW TIRES  
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires  
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type  
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S  
designation on the tire side wall.  
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.  
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with  
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type  
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain  
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a  
smooth, quiet ride.  
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and  
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only  
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the  
safety and handling of your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
176 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your  
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”  
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-  
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual  
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested  
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the  
diagram.  
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED  
Autostick is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers  
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more  
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak-  
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and  
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can  
also provide you with more control during passing, city  
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,  
trailer towing, and many other situations.  
Autostick Operation  
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive posi-  
tion and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When  
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can  
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left  
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.  
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear  
display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 177  
Autostick General Information  
The transaxle will automatically upshift from first to  
second gear and from second to third gear when  
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.  
Downshifts from third to second gear above 66 mph  
(106 km/ h) and from second to first gear above 37  
mph (60 km/ h) will be ignored.  
You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting  
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed  
reaches 15 mph (24 km/ h).  
5
Gear Selector  
The transaxle will automatically downshift to first  
gear when coming to a stop.  
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time  
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you  
choose the Overdrive mode, the transaxle will operate  
automatically; shifting between the four available gears.  
When you wish to engage autostick, simply move the  
autostick lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The trans-  
axle will remain in the current gear until an upshift or  
downshift is chosen.  
Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy  
conditions.  
While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only  
function in third or fourth gear. Downshifting out of  
third gear turns off speed control.  
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the  
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and  
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.  
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out  
of the Autostick mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
178 STARTING AND OPERATING  
If the system detects a problem it will disable the  
Autostick mode and the transaxle will return to the  
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.  
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard  
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these  
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-  
fore considering service for the vehicle.  
FUEL REQUIREMENTS  
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-  
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world  
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-  
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define  
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,  
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The  
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet  
the WWFC specifications if they are available.  
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel  
economy when using high quality regular  
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of  
87. The use of premium gasoline is not  
recommended. The use of premium gaso-  
line will provide no benefit over high quality regular  
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in  
poorer performance.  
Reformulated Gasoline  
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner  
burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.  
Spark Knock  
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to  
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at  
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is  
required.  
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-  
cially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve  
air quality.  
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-  
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-  
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and  
fuel system components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 179  
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends  
MMT in Gasoline  
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with mate-  
rials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and  
ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the  
country during the winter months to reduce carbon  
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygen-  
ates may be used in your vehicle.  
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is  
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-  
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance  
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number  
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown  
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system  
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-  
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT  
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,  
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not  
his/ her gasoline contains MMT.  
CAUTION!  
5
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of  
these blends may result in starting and driveability  
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-  
ponents.  
It is even more important to look for gasolines without  
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at higher  
levels than allowed in the United States.  
Problems that result from using methanol/ gasoline  
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.  
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it  
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.  
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California refor-  
mulated gasolines.  
Materials Added to Fuel  
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to  
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional  
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
180 STARTING AND OPERATING  
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore  
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.  
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems  
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not  
the responsibility of the manufacturer.  
Fuel System Cautions  
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
CAUTION!  
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s  
performance:  
Carbon Monoxide Warnings  
WARNING!  
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.  
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,  
or damage the emission control system.  
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.  
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon  
monoxide poisoning:  
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition  
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to  
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or  
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or  
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.  
Contact your dealer for service assistance.  
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon  
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.  
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a  
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the  
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is  
stopped in an open area with the engine running for  
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system  
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.  
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as  
octane enhancers are not recommended. Most of these  
products contain high concentrations of methanol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 181  
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-  
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time  
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions  
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side  
windows fully open.  
CAUTION!  
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can  
operate on E-85.  
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to  
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-  
haust gases from entering the vehicle.  
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)  
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and  
15% unleaded gasoline.  
5
FLEXIBLE FUEL— (Fleet Vehicles Only)  
WARNING!  
E-85 General Information  
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-  
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique  
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-  
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those  
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to  
the other sections of this manual for information on  
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and  
gasoline only powered vehicles.  
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could  
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-  
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-  
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the  
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never  
use it near an open flame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
182 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Fuel Requirements  
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles  
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles  
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or  
unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the  
same. Refer to “Engine Oil Selection in the “Maintenance  
Procedures” section of this manual for the proper quality  
and viscosity engine oil.  
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with  
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of  
these two.  
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-  
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.  
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that  
Starting  
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less  
than 1/ 4 full  
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use  
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F. In the range  
of 0°F to 32°F, you may experience an increase in the time  
it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in  
drivability (sags and/ or hesitations) until the engine is  
fully warmed up.  
you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling  
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for  
a period of at least 5 minutes  
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard  
starting and/ or significant deterioration in drivability  
during warm up.  
Cruising Range  
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than  
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-  
sumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving  
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline  
operation.  
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F,  
you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow-  
ing start up even if the above recommendations are  
followed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 183  
Replacement Parts  
ADDING FUEL  
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are  
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure  
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-  
patible parts.  
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)  
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the drivers  
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be  
sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol  
compatible components can damage your vehicle.  
5
Damage to the fuel system or emission control  
system could result from using an improper fuel  
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap  
could let impurities into the fuel system.  
Maintenance  
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-  
ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.  
CAUTION!  
CAUTION!  
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top  
off” the fuel tank after filling.  
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your  
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and  
may affect driveability.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
184 STARTING AND OPERATING  
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”  
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly  
tightened.  
WARNING!  
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near  
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the  
tank filled.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on if the  
gas cap is not properly secured. Make sure that the gas  
cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.  
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is  
running.  
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the  
fuel tank is full.  
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You  
could be burned. Always place gas containers on  
the ground while filling.  
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube may have a restricting  
door about 50 mm (2 inches) down from the opening. If  
fuel is poured from a portable container, the container  
should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open  
the restricting door.  
CAUTION!  
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp to turn on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 185  
VEHICLE LOADING  
Common Towing Definitions  
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist  
you in understanding the following information:  
Vehicle Loading Capacities  
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs. (52 kg)  
Rated Vehicle Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . 865 lbs. ( 392 kg)  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)  
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.  
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue  
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not  
exceed the GVWR.  
TRAILER TOWING  
In this section you will find safety tips and information  
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do  
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-  
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and  
safely as possible.  
5
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)  
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer  
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment  
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its  
Љloaded and ready for operationЉ condition. The recom-  
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded  
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer  
must be supported by the scale.  
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements  
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-  
hicles used for trailer towing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
186 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)  
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total  
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when  
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-  
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a  
driver).  
Tongue Weight (TW)  
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the  
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or  
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this  
as part of the load on your vehicle.  
Frontal Area  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)  
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of  
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear  
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles  
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or  
rear GAWR.  
a trailer.  
Trailer Sway Control  
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be  
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue  
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with  
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer  
swaying motions while traveling.  
WARNING!  
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum  
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition  
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose  
control of the vehicle and have an accident.  
Weight-Carrying Hitch  
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue  
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or  
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of  
hitches are the most popular on the market today and  
theyre commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized  
trailers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 187  
Weight-Distributing Hitch  
Trailer Hitch Classification  
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached  
to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and  
spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening  
and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the  
trailer frame.  
Class  
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer  
Wt.)  
Class I - Light Duty  
2,000 lbs (907 kg)  
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)  
Class II - Medium  
Duty  
Trailer Hitch Classification  
Class III - Heavy Duty  
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)  
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)  
The following chart provides the industry standard for  
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can  
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the  
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.  
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer  
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your  
given drivetrain.  
Class IV - Extra  
Heavy Duty  
5
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on  
your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
188 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight  
Ratings)  
The following chart provides the maximum trailer  
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.  
Engine/Transmission  
Frontal Area  
20 Sq. Ft  
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note  
1)  
2.4L Automatic/  
Manual  
1000 lbs (454 kg)  
110 lbs (50 kg)  
2.7L Automatic/  
Manual  
20 Sq. Ft.  
1000 lbs (454 kg)  
110 lbs (50 kg)  
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.  
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as  
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and  
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire  
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–  
Safety Information Section in this manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 189  
Trailer and Tongue Weight  
Consider the following items when computing the  
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:  
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in  
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the  
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your  
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the  
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side  
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.  
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of  
many trailer accidents.  
The tongue weight of the trailer.  
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment  
put in or on your vehicle.  
The weight of the driver and all passengers.  
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the  
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional  
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,  
must be considered as part of the total load on your  
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-  
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual  
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and  
cargo for your vehicle.  
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on  
your bumper or trailer hitch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
190 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Towing Requirements  
WARNING!  
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-  
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-  
mended:  
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.  
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing  
as safe as possible:  
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer  
and will not shift during travel. When trailering  
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts  
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to  
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and  
have an accident.  
CAUTION!  
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805  
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage  
your vehicle.  
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer  
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).  
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-  
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a  
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,  
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-  
sis structure or tires.  
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this  
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,  
or GCWR, ratings.  
Safety chains must always be used between your  
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the  
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the  
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough  
slack for turning corners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 191  
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.  
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow  
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in  
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the  
transmission into reverse. Always, block or ЉchockЉ the  
trailer wheels.  
Towing Requirements — Tires  
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact  
spare tire.  
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe  
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the  
Tires–General Information section of this manual on  
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.  
GCWR must not be exceeded.  
Total weight must be distributed between the tow  
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four  
ratings are not exceeded:  
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation  
pressures before trailer usage.  
5
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage  
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General  
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear  
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.  
1. GVWR  
2. GTW  
3. GAWR  
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-  
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for  
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires  
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase  
the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.  
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized  
(This requirement may limit the ability to always  
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a  
percentage of total trailer weight).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes  
CAUTION!  
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or  
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.  
This could cause inadequate braking and possible  
personal injury.  
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)  
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they  
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this  
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher  
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.  
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is  
required when towing a trailer with electronically  
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with  
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic  
brake controller is not required.  
WARNING!  
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-  
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-  
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes  
when you need them and could have an accident.  
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000  
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000  
lbs (907 kg).  
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-  
tance. When towing you should allow for additional  
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front  
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STARTING AND OPERATING 193  
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring  
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,  
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for  
motoring safety.  
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin  
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness  
and connector.  
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles  
wiring harness.  
5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle  
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.  
Refer to the following illustrations.  
4 - Pin Connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
194 STARTING AND OPERATING  
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission  
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if  
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range  
should be selected.  
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle  
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-  
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-  
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also  
provide better engine braking.  
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be  
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than  
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in  
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change  
intervals.  
7- Pin Connector  
Towing Tips  
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping  
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy  
traffic.  
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level  
before towing.  
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,  
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch  
slippage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STARTING AND OPERATING 195  
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If  
Equipped)  
Highway Driving  
Reduce speed.  
Dont use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.  
Air Conditioning  
Turn off temporarily.  
When using the speed control, if you experience speed  
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/ h), disengage until  
you can get back to cruising speed.  
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the  
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-  
tion.  
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to  
maximize fuel efficiency.  
5
Towing Tips — Cooling System  
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-  
heating, take the following actions:  
City Driving  
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission  
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
CONTENTS  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
6
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
198 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
Do not use this emergency warning system when the  
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled  
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.  
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the  
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition  
key removed and the vehicle locked.  
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down  
your battery.  
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS  
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the  
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-  
tion.  
Hazard Flasher Switch  
On the highways — Slow down.  
The flasher switch is on top of the steering column,  
just behind the steering wheel. Depress the switch  
and both cluster indicators and all front and rear direc-  
tional signals will flash. Depress the switch again to turn  
Hazard Warning Flashers off.  
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in  
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 199  
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down  
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner  
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to  
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C  
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature  
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and  
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act  
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat  
from the engine cooling system.  
WARNING!  
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or  
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling  
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your  
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the  
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this  
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling  
System Pressure Cap paragraph.  
CAUTION!  
6
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage  
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull  
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle in Park  
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer  
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer  
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,  
and call for service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING  
Preparations for Jacking  
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or  
slippery areas, and set the parking brake. Place the gear  
selector in PARK.  
WARNING!  
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.  
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.  
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your  
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start  
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If  
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a  
service center where it can be raised on a lift.  
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher, park vehicle on  
firm, level surface.  
Put gear shift in park (automatic transmission) or  
reverse (manual transmission).  
Set parking brake and turn off engine.  
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off  
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when  
operating the jack or changing the wheel.  
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the  
vehicle is being jacked.  
Changing a Tire  
The spare wheel, scissors jack, and lug wrench are  
stowed under the spare tire cover in the rear cargo area.  
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing  
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the  
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should  
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or  
slippery areas.  
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 201  
1. Block wheel diagonally op-  
posite flat tire.  
2. Remove the spare tire, scissors jack and lug wrench  
from stowage.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
3. Before raising the vehicle, use lug wrench to carefully  
pry off wheel cover (if equipped with steel wheels) or  
center cap (if equipped with aluminum wheels). Loosen,  
but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them  
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the  
ground.  
WARNING!  
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel  
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal  
edges and retention teeth.  
4. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack  
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange. Use the lift area  
closest to the flat tire  
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove flat tire and  
install spare tire.  
Center Cap Removal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 203  
6
Jack Engagement Locations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
WARNING!  
WARNING!  
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make  
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and  
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough  
to remove the tire.  
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or  
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-  
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in  
the places provided.  
6. Remove lug nuts and tire.  
7. Mount spare tire.  
12. Wheel cover installation (if required). Do not attempt  
to install a wheel cover on a compact spare. Align valve  
notch in wheel cover with valve stem on wheel. Snap  
cover into place.  
8. Tighten all lug nuts on mounting studs.  
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack  
handle counterclockwise.  
NOTE: When reinstalling the center cap it is necessary  
to align the center cap notch with the first spoke, just  
right of the valve stem.  
10. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque wheel lug nuts to  
100 ft. lbs. (135 N·m).  
13. Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct  
pressure is on the label located on the drivers door.  
11. Store the flat tire, jack and tools.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 205  
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS  
LOW  
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind  
the left front fender and is accessible without removing  
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located  
in the engine compartment for jump starting.  
WARNING!  
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry  
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an  
inadvertent electrical contact.  
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get  
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic  
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned  
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once  
the engine has started, ignite and damage the  
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-  
charged battery, booster cables may be used to  
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of  
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so  
follow this procedure carefully.  
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park  
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without  
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-  
matic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to OFF for  
both vehicles.  
6
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical  
loads.  
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-  
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the  
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.  
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive  
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end to  
the positive jump start attachment of the discharged  
battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
206 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal  
of the booster battery and then to the jump start attach-  
ment of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make  
sure you have a good contact on the engine.  
WARNING!  
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this  
could establish a ground connection and person  
injury could result.  
WARNING!  
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the  
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark  
could cause the battery to explode.  
During cold weather when temperatures are below  
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery  
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because  
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery  
temperature must be brought up above freezing  
point before attempting to jump start.  
Jump Starting  
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster  
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the  
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 207  
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above  
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.  
WARNING!  
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not  
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.  
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or  
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes  
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area  
immediately with large quantities of water.  
WARNING!  
Any procedure other than above could result in:  
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting  
out the battery vent;  
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-  
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away  
from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any  
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12  
volts.  
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery  
explosion;  
6
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or  
of immobilized vehicle.  
WARNING!  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-  
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after  
handling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
208 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES  
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To  
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should  
be observed:  
Acceleration  
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-  
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-  
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when  
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front  
(driving) wheels, particularly with high output engines.  
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are  
slushy.  
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.  
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become  
visible.  
WARNING!  
4. Keep tires properly inflated.  
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-  
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of  
the front wheels. You could lose control of the  
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate  
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be  
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).  
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and  
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden  
stop.  
NOTE: If so equipped, turn on the Traction Control  
System to accelerate on slippery surfaces.  
Traction  
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a  
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road  
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 209  
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE  
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE  
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control, turn  
the system off before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.  
Flat bed towing is the preferred towing method. If a flat  
bed towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing  
vehicle may be used.  
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it  
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your  
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the  
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse  
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-  
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the  
wheels is most effective.  
Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels  
on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear  
towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be  
used.  
CAUTION!  
6
Do not use sling type towing equipment. Damage to  
the fascia and air dam may result.  
CAUTION!  
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast  
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can  
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above  
35 mph (55 km/h).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
210 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER  
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the  
ground)  
CAUTION!  
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the  
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in  
the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions.  
Automatic Transaxle  
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-  
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the  
distance to be towed must not exceed 15 miles (25 km),  
and the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40  
km/ h). If the transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle  
is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km), the vehicle  
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.  
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed  
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON  
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the  
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
CONTENTS  
2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Hoses And Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 235  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
7
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 224  
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
212 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Fog Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Center Stoplight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 253  
Rear Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253  
License Plate Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Headlight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 213  
2.4L ENGINE  
7
2.4L Engine Compartment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
214 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
2.7L ENGINE  
2.7L Engine Compartment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 215  
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  
CAUTION!  
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard  
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors  
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic  
transmission control systems. When these systems are  
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent  
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-  
sions well within current government regulations.  
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-  
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the  
emission control system. It could also affect fuel  
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be  
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-  
formed.  
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system  
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will  
also store diagnostic codes and other information to  
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-  
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not  
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as  
possible.  
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing  
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-  
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.  
Immediate service is required.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
216 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
PROGRAMS  
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank  
or start the engine.  
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass  
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.  
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.  
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start  
this test over.  
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you  
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal  
bulb check.  
For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and  
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the  
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)  
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,  
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready  
for testing.  
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will  
happen:  
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then  
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off  
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that  
your vehicles OBD system is not ready and you  
should not proceed to the I/ M station.  
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD  
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently  
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery  
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined  
not ready for the I/ M test, your vehicle may fail the test.  
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully  
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or  
start the engine. This means that your vehicles OBD  
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/ M  
station.  
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test  
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To  
check if your vehicles OBD system is ready, you must do  
the following:  
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 217  
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your  
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was  
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,  
you may need to do nothing more than drive your  
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD  
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine  
may then indicate that the system is now ready.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS  
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/ scheduled main-  
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the  
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the  
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will  
not be covered by the manufacturers warranty.  
DEALER SERVICE  
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD system is  
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated  
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your  
vehicle serviced before going to the I/ M station. The I/ M  
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on  
with the engine running.  
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special  
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in  
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which  
include detailed service information for your vehicle.  
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure  
yourself.  
7
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control  
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  
against you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
218 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Engine Oil  
WARNING!  
Checking Oil Level  
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.  
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform  
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent  
mechanic.  
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicles engine, the  
engine oil must be maintained, at the correct level. Check  
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.  
The best time to check the oil level is about 5 minutes  
after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting  
the engine after it has sat overnight.  
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will  
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain  
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the  
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at  
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these  
engines.  
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES  
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance  
services determined by the engineers who designed your  
vehicle.  
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed  
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should  
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.  
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it  
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.  
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is  
observed or suspected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 219  
Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C)  
Stop and Go driving  
Extensive engine idling.  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)  
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C)  
Trailer towing  
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)  
Off— road or desert operation  
Engine Oil Dipstick  
7
CAUTION!  
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
Overfilling or underfilling will cause aeration or  
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule “Bof the  
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
Change Engine Oil  
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the  
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the  
following list to decide if any apply to you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
220 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil  
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-  
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil  
Identification Symbol  
This symbol means that the oil has  
been certified by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). We  
only recommend API Certified en-  
gine oils that meet the require-  
ments of DaimlerChryslers Mate-  
rial Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar  
or an equivalent oil meeting the  
specification MS-6395.  
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change  
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months  
whichever comes first.  
Engine Oil Selection  
For best performance and maximum protection under all  
types of operating conditions, we recommend engine oils  
that are API Certified and meet the requirements of  
DaimlerChryslers Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mo-  
par or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-  
6395.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 221  
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)  
Synthetic Engine Oils  
You may use synthetic engine oils provided that the  
recommended oil quality requirements are met and the  
recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter  
changes are followed.  
Materials Added To Engine Oils  
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-  
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to  
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its  
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-  
tives.  
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters  
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from  
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can  
present a problem to the environment. Contact your  
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice  
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in  
your area.  
7
Engine Oil Fill Cap  
SAE 5W-20 and SAE 5W-30 engine oils are recom-  
mended for all operating temperatures. These engine  
oils are designed to improve low temperature starting  
and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to the engine oil filler  
cap for the preferred engine oil viscosity grade for each  
vehicle.  
Engine Oil Filter  
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine  
oil change.  
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-  
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-  
ber should not be used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
222 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Engine Oil Filter Selection  
Spark Plugs  
All manufacturers engines have a full-flow type dispos-  
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The  
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only  
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient  
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil  
filters and are recommended.  
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-  
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-  
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be  
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark  
plug. Check the specifications section for the proper type  
of spark plug for use in your vehicle.  
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension  
Engine Air Cleaner Filter  
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,  
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.  
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.  
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at  
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you  
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-  
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-  
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on  
Schedule “B.  
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or  
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage  
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-  
quired, adjust the belts according to the specifications  
and procedures shown in the Service Manual.  
Special tools are required to properly measure tension  
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,  
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference  
between the belts and other engine components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 223  
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-  
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-  
portant to keep the engine properly serviced to assure  
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst  
damage.  
WARNING!  
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection  
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air  
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or  
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the  
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with  
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in  
serious personal injury.  
CAUTION!  
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In  
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-  
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-  
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-  
Engine Fuel Filter  
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the  
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an  
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,  
frequent filter replacement may be necessary.  
7
ued operation of your vehicle with  
a
severe  
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,  
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the  
vehicle.  
Catalytic Converter  
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel  
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the  
catalyst as an emission control device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
224 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  
disconnected for prolonged period.  
WARNING!  
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over  
materials that can burn. Such materials might be  
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-  
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in  
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-  
thing that can burn.  
Engine Timing Belt  
Replace the engine timing belt (2.4L Only) at the intervals  
described in the appropriate maintenance schedule.  
Crankcase Emission Control System  
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom  
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle  
mileage builds up, the Positive Crankshaft Ventilation  
(PCV) valve and passages may accumulate deposits. If a  
valve is not working properly, replace it with a new  
valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV  
VALVE!  
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe  
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop  
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.  
Service, to the manufacturers specifications, should be  
obtained immediately.  
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or  
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.  
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:  
Maintenance-Free Battery  
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition  
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in  
motion.  
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-  
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is  
periodic maintenance required.  
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the  
vehicle.  
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind  
the left front fender and is accessible without removing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 225  
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located  
in the engine compartment for jump starting.  
WARNING!  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-  
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after  
handling. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution  
and can burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery  
fluid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t  
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid  
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-  
ately with large amounts of water. Battery gas is  
flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks  
away from the battery. Don’t use a booster battery or  
any other booster source with an output greater than  
12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to touch each  
other.  
7
Battery Location  
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the  
right and remove the inner fender shield.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
through the condenser as required. Fabric front fascia  
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing  
air conditioning performance.  
CAUTION!  
It is essential when replacing the cables on the  
battery that the positive cable is attached to the  
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the  
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)  
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.  
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts  
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and  
clamps after tightening. If a “fast charger” is used  
while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both  
vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger  
to battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide  
starting voltage as battery damage can result.  
WARNING!  
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants  
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-  
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are  
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other  
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause  
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer  
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for  
further warranty information.  
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant  
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal  
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant  
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected  
should be done by an experienced repairman.  
Air Conditioner  
Check the air conditioning system at the start of the  
warm weather season.  
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems  
lower than expected, check the front of the A/ C con-  
denser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with  
a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 227  
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling  
WARNING!  
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-  
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-  
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-  
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning  
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities  
using recovery and recycling equipment.  
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with  
the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,  
and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not  
overfill. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended  
fluid.  
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/ C System  
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-  
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.  
Power Steering — Fluid Check  
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined  
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be  
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are  
apparent, and/ or the system is not functioning as antici-  
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified  
“DaimlerChrysler Dealership”.  
7
Before removing the reservoir cap, wipe the outside of  
the cap and reservoir so that no dirt can fall into the  
reservoir.  
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
228 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Fluid level should be maintained at the proper level  
indicated on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add  
fluid to restore the proper indicated level. With a clean  
cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to  
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid  
type.  
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism  
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.  
Hood Latch  
When performing other under hood services, the hood  
latch release mechanism and safety catch should be  
inspected, cleaned, and lubricated.  
Suspension Ball Joints  
It is important to maintain proper lubrication to insure  
that the hood mechanisms work properly and safely.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, NLGI Grade 2, should be ap-  
plied sparingly to all pivot and sliding contact areas.  
There are two upper front and rear suspension ball joints.  
Inspect these ball joints whenever under vehicle service is  
done. If the seals are damaged, the ball joint should be  
replaced.  
External Lock Cylinders  
Body Mechanism Lubrication  
Lubricate the external lock cylinders twice a year, prefer-  
ably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of  
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or  
equivalent directly into the lock cylinder (avoid excess  
lubricant). Insert the key into the lock cylinder and rotate  
from the unlocked to the locked position; without adding  
more lubricant. Repeat this procedure three or four times.  
Wipe all the lubricant off the key with a clean cloth, to  
avoid soiling clothing.  
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as  
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be  
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation  
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-  
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be  
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating  
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular  
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-  
nents to insure proper function. When performing other  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 229  
If you use a lubricant that cannot be dispensed directly  
into the lock cylinder, apply a small amount of the  
lubricant to the key. Insert the key into the lock cylinder,  
then proceed as described above, to distribute the lubri-  
cant within the lock cylinder. Pay attention to trunk  
hinges, especially during cold weather, to ensure ease of  
trunk operation.  
Smooth White Body Lubricant - Such as Mopar  
Spray White Lube or equivalent:  
Hood hinge springs and links  
Lock cylinders  
Parking brake mechanism  
Trunk latches  
Other Body Mechanisms  
The following body mechanisms should be inspected  
and, if necessary, all pivot and sliding contact areas of  
these components should be lubricated with the lubricant  
specified as follows:  
Ash tray  
Windshield Wiper Blades  
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a  
mild non abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-  
tions of salt or road film.  
7
Engine Oil  
Door hinges  
Hood hinges  
Trunk hinges  
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods  
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use  
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt  
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to  
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade  
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as  
engine oil, gasoline, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement  
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.  
Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assem-  
bly away from the wiper arm. Gently place the wiper  
arm on the windshield.  
Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip  
until it locks in place.  
Windshield Washers  
The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be  
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the  
reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator anti-  
freeze) rated not to freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate the  
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.  
Washer Fluid Reservoir  
WARNING!  
Commercially available windshield washer solvents  
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care  
must be exercised when filling or working around  
the washer solution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 231  
Exhaust System  
Cooling System  
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  
system.  
WARNING!  
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-  
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition  
switch to the OFF position. The fan is controlled  
by both the temperature of the engine cooling  
system and the pressure in the air conditioning  
system and can start at any time the ignition  
switch is in the ON position.  
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;  
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or  
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;  
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust  
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,  
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or  
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep  
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the  
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-  
cation or oil change. Replace as required.  
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant  
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear  
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open  
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.  
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap  
when the radiator is hot.  
7
WARNING!  
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon  
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.  
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can  
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-  
low the preceding safety tips.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
232 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Coolant Checks  
Selection Of Coolant  
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12  
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where  
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the  
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh  
coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any accumu-  
lation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently  
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the  
face of the condenser.  
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer  
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct  
coolant type.  
CAUTION!  
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-  
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may  
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-  
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an  
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified  
coolant as soon as possible.  
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-  
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection  
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for  
leaks.  
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine  
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional  
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not  
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and  
may plug the radiator.  
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill  
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,  
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.  
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount  
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling  
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove  
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old  
antifreeze solution.  
This vehicle has not been designed for use with  
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene  
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 233  
Adding Coolant  
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-  
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-  
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where  
the vehicle is operated.  
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine  
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This  
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before  
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-  
nance period, it is important that you use the same  
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review  
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-  
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.  
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the  
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant  
changes.  
Cooling System Pressure Cap  
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of  
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the  
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.  
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-  
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000  
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-  
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher  
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below  
Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C ) are anticipated.  
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any  
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.  
7
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized  
water when mixing the water/ engine coolant solution.  
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of  
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
234 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician  
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.  
WARNING!  
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on  
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-  
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is  
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to  
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure  
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent  
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap  
while the system is hot or under pressure.  
Coolant Level  
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for  
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the  
engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle  
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.  
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is  
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for  
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your  
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating  
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only  
be checked once a month. Heater performance may also  
be adversely affected by low coolant levels.  
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one  
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or  
engine damage may result.  
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant  
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the  
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do  
not overfill. Special procedures are required when filling  
the engine cooling system of the 2.7L Engine. See your  
authorized dealer for details.  
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated  
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your  
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your  
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children  
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open  
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 235  
Points To Remember  
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine  
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper  
corrosion protection of your engine which contains  
aluminum components.  
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a  
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor  
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is  
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high  
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-  
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to  
enter the radiator.  
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery  
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.  
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is  
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the  
condenser clean, also.  
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no  
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be  
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.  
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter  
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install  
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may  
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas  
mileage, and increased emissions.  
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.  
7
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the  
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be  
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be  
protected against freezing.  
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses  
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence  
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,  
brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions,  
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rub-  
ber.  
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the  
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when  
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-  
sure tested for leaks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
236 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high  
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose  
routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or  
moving component that may cause heat damage or  
mechanical wear.  
WARNING!  
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting  
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and  
possible brake damage. You may not have your full  
braking capacity in an emergency.  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps  
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks  
are present. Components should be replaced immedi-  
ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could  
cause failure.  
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses  
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,  
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of  
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,  
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive  
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular  
attention should be made to examining those hose sur-  
faces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust  
manifold.  
Brakes  
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake  
system components should be inspected periodically.  
Suggested service intervals can be found in section 8.  
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they  
are secure and no leaks are present.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 237  
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or  
collapsed.  
Master Cylinder  
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked  
when performing under hood services, or immediately if  
the brake system warning lamp shows system failure.  
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,  
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-  
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-  
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-  
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot  
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle  
operation) should be noted before hose is replaced based  
on leakage.  
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done  
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine  
oil change.  
7
WARNING!  
Brake Fluid Reservoir  
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.  
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of  
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake  
hoses replaced immediately.  
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before  
removing the cap. If necessary, fill brake fluid reservoir to  
the top of the fill mark chevron. With disc brakes, fluid  
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.  
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a  
checkup may be needed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer  
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid  
type.  
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the  
brake fluid as seal damage will result!  
Fuel System Hoses  
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are  
designed with hoses and clamps which have unique  
material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and  
resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.  
WARNING!  
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling  
point than MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid or that is  
unidentified as to DOT FMVSS specification may  
result in sudden brake failure during hard or pro-  
longed braking. You could have an accident.  
You are urged to use only manufacturer specified hoses  
and clamps, or their equivalent in material and specifi-  
cation, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to  
replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed  
during service. Care should be taken in installing new  
clamps to insure they are properly torqued.  
WARNING!  
Automatic Transmission  
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in  
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the  
brake fluid catching fire.  
Your front wheel drive vehicle has a transmission and  
differential assembly contained within a single housing.  
This is referred to as a “Transaxle.”  
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed  
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239  
Selection of Lubricant  
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level  
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the  
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-  
mance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmis-  
sion fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts  
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission  
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the  
recommended fluid.  
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be  
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with  
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the  
transaxle and of the fluid.  
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the  
following procedure must be used:  
The vehicle must be on level ground.  
The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a  
minimum of 60 seconds.  
CAUTION!  
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-  
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration  
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter  
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the  
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in  
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to  
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct  
fluid type.  
Fully apply parking brake.  
7
Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear  
position ending with the lever in P (PARK).  
Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.  
Remove dipstick and note reading.  
If the fluid is cold (80°F / 27°C), the reading should be  
in the cross hatched area marked “COLD” (between  
the lower two holes in the dipstick).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
If the fluid is hot (180°F / 82°C), the reading should be  
in the cross hatched area marked ”HOT” (between the  
upper two holes in the dipstick).  
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or  
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for  
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.  
If the fluid level shows low, add sufficient transmis-  
sion fluid to bring to the proper level.  
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte-  
nance schedules.  
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid  
and filter should be changed.  
CAUTION!  
Special Additives  
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can  
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water  
from entering the transaxle after checking or replen-  
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is  
seated properly.  
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-  
tion of any additives to the transaxle. The only exception  
to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting  
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be  
avoided as they may adversely affect seals.  
Fluid Level Check  
Fluid and Filter Changes  
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid  
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a  
point not more than 4.0 mm below the bottom of the hole.  
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.  
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be  
changed as follows:  
Maintenance schedule “A” No change necessary.  
Maintenance schedule “B” — Every 60,000 miles (96 000  
km) change fluid and filter under the following condi-  
tions:  
Frequency of Fluid Change  
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at  
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241  
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the  
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If con-  
taminated with water, the fluid should be changed im-  
mediately.  
What Causes Corrosion?  
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of  
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.  
The most common causes are:  
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion  
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.  
Stone and gravel impact.  
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion  
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-  
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads  
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on  
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly  
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,  
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,  
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme  
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will  
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-  
body protection.  
Insects, tree sap and tar.  
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.  
Atmospheric fallout/ industrial pollutants.  
Washing  
7
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-  
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and  
rinse the panels completely with clear water.  
The following maintenance recommendations will enable  
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion  
resistance built into your vehicle.  
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-  
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.  
Use Mopar auto polish or equivalent to remove road  
film and stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care  
never to scratch the paint.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing  
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint  
finish.  
Use Mopar touch up paint or equivalent on scratches  
or chips as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up  
paint to match the color of your vehicle.  
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or  
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective  
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.  
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-  
ity of the owner.  
CAUTION!  
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials  
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will  
scratch metal and painted surfaces.  
Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly with  
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove  
heavy soil, select a non abrasive, non acidic cleaner. Do  
not use scouring pads or metal polishes. Avoid auto-  
matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh  
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-  
ish.  
Special Care  
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive  
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once  
a month.  
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges  
of the doors, rocker panels and rear deck lid be kept  
clear and open.  
Your painted and chrome aluminum wheels should be  
treated as you would treat the finish on your car.  
Always use a soft non-abrasive cloth with a mild dish  
washing soap and water when cleaning your wheels.  
Never use scouring pads, steel wool or a bristle brush.  
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,  
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is  
considered the responsibility of the owner.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243  
Never use cleaners that contain acid, oven cleaners or  
any abrasive metal cleaner as they will cause perma-  
nent staining and/ or corrosion.  
You should not increase the gloss level, especially on top  
of the instrument panel top surface. Higher gloss levels  
will increase the reflectivity in the windshield that could  
decrease visibility under bright light driving conditions.  
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,  
deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well  
packaged and sealed.  
WARNING!  
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider  
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.  
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.  
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in  
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.  
Interior Care  
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric  
upholstery and carpeting.  
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning  
7
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl or  
leather upholstery.  
CAUTION!  
Mopar Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent is specifically recom-  
mended for vinyl trim.  
Never use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,  
detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean the  
leather. The leather has already been pretreated. The  
application of any leather conditioner may damage  
the factory applied top coat.  
Use mild (Ivory Flake) solution or equivalent to clean all  
surfaces. Wipe with clear water and soft (lint free) cloth.  
Do not use cleaners, conditioners and protectants con-  
taining silicon or bleach as these may cause gloss level  
increases and/ or discoloration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a  
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an  
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be  
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils  
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total  
Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid  
soaking the leather with any liquid.  
Glass Surfaces  
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis  
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.  
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when  
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric  
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-  
ments which may scratch the elements.  
Cleaning Headlights  
Instrument Panel Cover  
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and  
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.  
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which  
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use  
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-  
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the  
low glare surface.  
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.  
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and  
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To  
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-  
lowed by rinsing.  
Cleaning Wood Trim  
Your vehicles wood trim requires no specific mainte-  
nance. Your wood trim can be cleaned as needed using  
regularly available automotive interior cleaning and pro-  
tecting products. Using a mild soap and water solution is  
also acceptable. Excess cleaning materials should be  
wiped dry with a soft terry cloth. Any harsh detergents,  
abrasives, abrasive cleaners, cleansers, or chemicals  
should be avoided, as these will damage the wood trim.  
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel  
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245  
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses  
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are  
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care  
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.  
FUSES  
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)  
Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be  
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive  
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp  
rag.  
Dry with a soft tissue.  
Seat Belt Maintenance  
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical  
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.  
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.  
7
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or  
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the  
vehicle to wash them.  
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the  
buckles do not work properly.  
Power Distribution Center  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
A Power Distribution Center is located in the engine  
compartment; near the air cleaner. This information ap-  
plies to vehicles built without the fuse and relay num-  
bering embossed on the Power Distribution Center Top  
Cover.  
The identity of each fuse is indicated on the backside of  
the cover.  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuit  
1
2
3
4
30 Amp  
Green  
Blower Motor  
10 Amp  
Red  
Right High Beam Headlight,  
High Beam Indicator  
Interior Fuses  
10 Amp  
Red  
Left High Beam Headlight  
15 Amp  
Blue  
Power Door Lock Switch Illumi-  
nation, Transmission Range  
Switch, Daytime Running Light  
Module (Canada), Power Win-  
dows, Anti-lock Brake System  
Module  
5
10 Amp  
Red  
Power Door Lock and Door Lock  
Arm/ Disarm Switches, Vanity,  
Reading, Map, Rear Seating, Igni-  
tion, and Trunk Lights, Illumi-  
nated Entry, Radio, Power An-  
tenna, Data Link Connector, Body  
Control Module, Power Amplifier  
Fuse Panel Cover  
The fuse access panel is behind the end cover at the left  
side of the instrument panel. To remove the panel, pull it  
out, as shown.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuit  
Cavity Fuse  
Circuit  
6
10 Amp  
Red  
Heated Rear Window Indicator  
15  
10 Amp  
Red  
Turn Signal and Hazard Flashers,  
Wiper Switch, Seat Belt Control  
Module, Wiper Relays, Rear Win-  
dow Defroster Relay  
7
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Instrument cluster illumination,  
Park and tail Lights  
16  
10 Amp  
Red  
Airbag Control Module  
8
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Power Receptacle, Horns, Igni-  
tion, Fuel, Start  
17  
18  
10 Amp  
20 Amp  
C/ BRKR Release  
Airbag Control Module  
9
15 Amp  
Blue  
Power Door Lock Motors (Body  
Control Module)  
Power Seat Switch, Remote Trunk  
10  
11  
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Daytime Running Light Module  
(Canada)  
19  
30 Amp  
C/ BRKR  
Power Windows  
10 Amp  
Red  
Instrument Cluster, Transmission  
Control, Park/ Neutral Switch,  
Body Control Module  
7
CAUTION!  
12  
13  
14  
10 Amp  
Red  
Left Low beam Headlight  
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use  
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The  
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may  
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a  
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a  
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.  
20 Amp  
Yellow  
Right Low Beam Headlight, Fog  
Light Switch  
10 Amp  
Red  
Radio  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
VEHICLE STORAGE  
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS  
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21  
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.  
You may:  
LIGHT BULBS — Interior  
Bulb Number  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 194  
ABS Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 161  
Fog Light Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 161  
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578  
Front Reading/ Map Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906  
Trunk Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562  
Climate Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC161  
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.  
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of  
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the  
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes  
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will  
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the  
possibility of compressor damage when the system is  
started again.  
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior  
Bulb Number  
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007  
Park/ Turn Signal (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A  
Side / Marker (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880L  
Tail/ Stop/ Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157  
Back Up Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921  
Center Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921  
License Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2825  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
2. Remove the push-in fasteners by prying under the  
head of the fasteners with a flat bladed tool.  
Headlight Bulb Replacement  
1. Open the hood and remove the two headlight mount-  
ing screws.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Gently pry the headlight assembly away from the  
fender as shown in the picture. This will free the ball stud  
from its retainer in the fender. Pull the headlight assem-  
bly away from the vehicle.  
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.  
CAUTION!  
4. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise and remove  
the bulb and socket assembly.  
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil  
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.  
6. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,  
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251  
7. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and turn the  
retaining ring clockwise to secure the bulb.  
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove the  
bulb and socket assembly.  
8. Reinstall the headlight assembly.  
Park, Turn Signal, Sidemarker Bulb Replacement  
1. Open the hood and remove the two headlight assem-  
bly mounting screws. Pull the headlight assembly away  
from the vehicle.  
7
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket, replace the bulb, and  
reinstall the bulb and socket to the headlight assembly.  
Reinstall the headlight assembly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
Fog Light Bulb Replacement  
4. Turn the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise  
to remove it from the housing.  
1. Remove the screws securing the light assembly to the  
front fascia.  
5. Install the new bulb and socket assembly, reattach the  
wiring connector, and reinstall the fog light assembly.  
2. Pull the light assembly away from the vehicle to  
expose the bulb and socket assembly.  
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb and  
socket assembly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253  
Center Stoplight Bulb Replacement  
Rear Light Bulb Replacement  
1. Open the trunk. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise  
to remove it from the housing.  
1. Open the trunk and pull the trunk liner away to  
expose the wiring connector and light housing plastic  
retainers.  
7
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket, replace the bulb and  
reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.  
2. Disconnect the wiring connector and remove the plas-  
tic retainers. Remove the light housing from the vehicle.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it  
from the housing. Remove and replace the bulb then  
reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
4. Reinstall the light housing and reconnect the wiring  
connector. Push the trunk liner back into place.  
Headlight Aiming  
The headlights on your new vehicle were aimed at the  
factory. The factory setting was made at a no load setting.  
A great increase in weight will change the aiming and it  
may be necessary to readjust the headlights if carrying an  
excessive amount of weight in the trunk, rear seats or  
pulling a trailer. To readjust the headlights first mark the  
position of the headlights on a wall prior to loading the  
vehicle. Load the vehicle and then readjust the headlights  
to the original position. If any further adjustments are  
necessary contact your manufacturers dealer. A detailed  
service procedure is contained in the manufacturers  
Service Manual. Information on purchasing a Service  
Manual can be found at the back of this Owners Manual.  
License Plate Bulb Replacement  
1. Locate both small slots on the outboard side of the  
license lamp. Using a small screwdriver, remove the  
entire housing.  
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it  
from the housing. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace  
the bulb and snap it back into place on the housing of the  
chrome appliqué.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255  
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES  
U.S.  
Metric  
61 Liters  
4.7 Liters  
Fuel (approximate)  
2.4 and 2.7 Liter Engines (87 Octane)  
16 Gallons  
5 qts.  
Engine Oil-With Filter  
2.4 and 2.7 Liter Engines (Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct  
SAE grade)  
Cooling System *  
2.4 Liter Engines* (MoparAntifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile  
8 qts.  
7.5 Liters  
9.0 Liters  
Formula) or equivalent.  
2.7 Liter Engines (MoparAntifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile  
9.5 qts.  
Formula) or equivalent.  
7
* Includes 1 qt. for coolant tank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS  
Engine  
Component  
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part  
Engine Coolant  
MoparAntifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-  
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.  
Engine Oil  
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 and SAE 5W-30 are recommended.  
Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting  
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.  
Spark Plugs  
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label under the engine  
hood.  
Oil Filter (2.4L Engine)  
Oil Filter (2.7L Engine)  
Fuel Selection  
MoparOil Filter (P/ N 4105409) or equivalent.  
MoparOil Filter (P/ N 5281090) or equivalent.  
87 Octane  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257  
Chassis  
Component  
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part  
Automatic Transaxle  
Brake Master Cylinder  
MoparATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.  
MoparDOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid  
is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake flu-  
ids.  
Power Steering Reservoir  
MoparPower Steering Fluid + 4, MoparATF+4 Automatic Transmission  
Fluid.  
Steering Gear & Linkage, Ball  
Joints, Prop Shafts & Yokes, Wheel  
Bearings  
MoparMulti-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 or equivalent.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
N
T
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
E
N
A
N
C
E
CONTENTS  
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Schedule “B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
260 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE  
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold  
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to  
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission  
control system. These, and all other maintenance services  
included in this manual, should be done to provide best  
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-  
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating  
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip  
driving.  
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
N
T
There are two maintenance schedules that show the  
required service for your vehicle.  
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated  
under the conditions that are listed below and at the  
beginning of the schedule.  
S
C
H
E
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).  
Stop and go driving.  
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a  
malfunction is suspected.  
Extensive engine idling.  
Driving in dusty conditions.  
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the  
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle  
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-  
ment or individual using any automotive part which has  
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of  
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.  
S
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).  
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).  
Trailer towing.छ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 261  
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-  
vice).छ  
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions  
listed for Schedule ЉBЉ.  
N
T
E
Off-road or desert operation.  
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not  
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-  
ule ЉBЉ.  
N
A
N
C
E
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-  
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the  
interval that occurs first.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the  
“Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual.  
S
C
H
E
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change  
intervals exceed 6 months or 6,000 miles, whichever  
comes first.  
D
U
L
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and  
replace the engine coolant every 100,000 miles (160,000  
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow  
schedule B of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this  
manual.  
E
S
CAUTION!  
8
Failure to perform the required maintenance items  
may result in damage to the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
262 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES  
At Each Stop for Fuel  
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for  
proper fit.  
N
T
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully  
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while  
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-  
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the  
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.  
E
At Each Oil Change  
N
A
N
C
E
Change the engine oil filter.  
Inspect the exhaust system.  
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if  
required.  
Inspect the brake linings, hoses and calipers.  
S
C
H
E
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension  
components.  
Once a Month  
D
U
L
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or  
damage.  
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.  
Check the brake master cylinder fluid level.  
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.  
E
S
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals  
as required.  
8
NOTE: In 2.7L Engines equipped with Flex Fuel Engine  
(FFV), change engine oil every 5 months or 5,000 miles,  
whichever comes first. This applies to both Maintenance  
Schedule A and B.  
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake  
master cylinder, and transaxle and add as needed.  
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct  
operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 263  
SCHEDULE “B”  
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser-  
N
T
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle  
under one or more of the following conditions. Change  
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000  
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under  
one or more of the conditions marked with an .  
vices).छ  
E
Off-road or desert operation.  
N
A
N
C
E
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)  
fuel.  
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).  
Stop and go driving.  
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your  
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,  
whichever comes first and follow schedule “Bof the  
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.  
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.  
D
U
L
Driving in dusty conditions.  
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and  
replace the engine coolant every 100,000 miles (160,000  
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow  
schedule B of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this  
manual.  
E
S
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).  
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high  
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).  
8
Trailer towing.छ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
264 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not  
replaced at 3 months.  
3,000  
(5 000)  
X
6,000  
9,000  
12,000  
15,000  
18,000  
(30 000)  
X
N
T
(10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if  
necessary.*  
X
X
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
S
C
H
E
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 265  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not  
replaced at 3 months.  
21,000  
24,000  
27,000  
30,000  
33,000  
36,000  
(60 000)  
X
N
T
(35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-  
quired.*  
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect and check tension for power steering  
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re-  
quired.  
D
U
L
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
X
X
E
S
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
valve. *  
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine.  
X
8
X
X
Rotate the tires.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
266 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not  
replaced at 3 months.  
39,000  
42,000  
45,000  
48,000  
51,000  
54,000  
(90 000)  
X
N
T
(65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if  
necessary.*  
X
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
S
C
H
E
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 267  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not  
replaced at 3 months.  
57,000  
60,000  
63,000  
66,000  
69,000  
72,000  
N
T
(95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if neces-  
sary.*  
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
Inspect and check tension for power steering belt  
(2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
D
U
L
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine.  
Replace the accessory drive belts on the 2.7 liter  
engine.  
X
X
E
S
8
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine.  
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡  
Change the automatic transmission fluid and  
X
X
X
filter.छ  
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if  
not done at 100,000 miles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
268 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not  
replaced at 3 months.  
75,000  
78,000  
81,000  
84,000  
87,000  
90,000  
N
T
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if  
necessary.*  
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect and check tension for power steering  
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re-  
quired.  
D
U
L
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter  
engine.  
X
E
S
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
8
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine.  
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
valve. *‡  
X
X
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 269  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not  
replaced at 3 months.  
93,000  
96,000  
99,000  
100,000  
102,000  
105,000  
N
T
(155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000) (180 000)  
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if  
necessary.*  
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
S
C
H
E
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.7 liter en-  
gine.  
X
D
U
L
Check and re-tension accessory drive belts on  
2.7 liter engine.  
X
X
E
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.4 liter  
engine.  
X
S
8
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not  
replaced at 60 months.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
270 SCHEDULE “B”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-  
placed at 3 months.  
108,000  
(185 000)  
X
111,000  
(190 000)  
X
114,000  
(195 000)  
X
117,000  
(200 000)  
X
120,000  
(205 000)  
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if neces-  
sary.*  
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine.  
Replace the ignition cables on the 2.4 liter engine.  
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, ro-  
tors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
Inspect and check tension for power steering belt  
(2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.  
X
X
E
S
Replace the accessory drive belts on the 2.7 liter en-  
gine.  
8
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *  
Change the automatic transmission fluid and fil-  
X
X
ter.छ  
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if  
not done at 100,000 miles.  
X
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 271  
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture  
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-  
sions warranty.  
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime  
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-  
ceipts.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
272 SCHEDULE “A”  
SCHEDULE “A”  
N
T
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
6,000  
(10 000)  
[6]  
12,000  
18,000  
24,000  
30,000  
36,000  
E
(20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)  
[12]  
X
N
A
N
C
E
[18]  
X
[24]  
X
[30]  
X
[36]  
X
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if  
X
X
X
X
X
necessary.*  
S
C
H
E
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine.  
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 273  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
42,000  
(70 000)  
[42]  
48,000  
(80 000)  
[48]  
54,000  
60,000  
66,000  
72,000  
N
T
(90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)  
E
[54]  
X
[60]  
X
[66]  
X
[72]  
X
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
X
X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if  
required.*  
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect and check tension for power steering  
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re-  
quired.  
D
U
L
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings,  
rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
E
S
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine.  
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60  
months, if not done at 100,000 miles.  
X
X
8
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
valve. *  
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter en-  
X
X
X
X
gine.  
Replace the accessory drive belts in 2.7 liter  
engine.  
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
274 SCHEDULE “A”  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
78,000  
84,000  
90,000  
96,000  
100,000 102,000 105,000  
N
T
(130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000) (180 000) (190 000)  
E
[78]  
X
[84]  
X
[90]  
X
[96]  
X
[102]  
X
[105]  
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace  
if required.*  
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, lin-  
ings, rotors, rear drums and shoes.  
X
X
S
C
H
E
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine.  
Replace the spark plugs on 2.7 liter engine.  
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV  
valve. *‡  
X
X
D
U
L
X
E
S
Check and re-tension alternator drive  
belts on 2.7 liter engine.  
X
X
8
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.4L  
engine.  
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if  
not replaced at 60 months.  
X
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 275  
Miles  
(Kilometers)  
[Months]  
108,000  
(200 000)  
[108]  
X
114,000  
(210 000)  
[114]  
X
120,000  
(220 000)  
[120]  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.  
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*  
Replace the air cleaner filter.  
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, rotors, rear drums  
and shoes.  
X
S
C
H
E
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine.  
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡  
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter engine.  
Inspect and check tension for power steering belt (2.4 Liter En-  
gine). Adjust or replace if required.  
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
Replace the accessory drive belts in 2.7 liter engine.  
X
X
X
8
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine.  
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if not done at  
100,000 miles.  
Rotate the tires.  
X
X
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture  
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-  
sions warranty.  
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
A
I
276 SCHEDULE “A”  
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime  
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-  
ceipts.  
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
WARNING!  
You can be badly injured working on or around a  
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which  
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If  
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a  
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-  
chanic.  
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
CONTENTS  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
MoparParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
278 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR  
YOUR VEHICLE  
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable  
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-  
pointment.  
Prepare For The Appointment  
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the  
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All  
work to be performed may not be covered by the  
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service  
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles  
service history. This can often provide a clue to the  
current problem.  
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in  
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our  
products and services.  
Warranty service must be done by an authorized  
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend  
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They  
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned  
that you get prompt and high quality service. The  
manufacturers dealers have the facilities, factory-trained  
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to  
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely  
manner.  
Prepare A List  
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the  
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident,  
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the  
service advisor know.  
Be Reasonable With Requests  
If you list a number of items, and you must have your  
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with  
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.  
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a  
This is why you should always talk to your dealers  
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with  
this process.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 279  
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the  
general manager or owner of the dealership. They  
want to know if you need assistance.  
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center  
P.O. Box 1621  
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6  
Phone —(800) 465–2001  
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you  
may contact the Manufacturers Customer Center.  
In Mexico contact:  
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240  
Sante Fe C.P. 05109  
Mexico, D. F.  
Any communication to the Manufacturers Customer  
Center should include the following information:  
Owners name and address  
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240  
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240  
Owners telephone number (home and office)  
Dealership name  
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  
Impaired (TDD/TTY)  
Vehicle identification number  
Vehicle delivery date and mileage  
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the  
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-  
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer  
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who  
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter  
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the  
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.  
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer  
Center  
P.O. Box 21–8004  
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004  
Phone: (800) 992-1997  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Service Contract  
We appreciate that you have made a major investment  
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has  
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and  
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with  
your ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their  
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related  
concerns.  
You may have purchased a service contract for your  
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-  
pected repairs after your manufacturers new vehicle  
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-  
hind only the manufacturers Service Contracts. If you  
purchased a manufacturers Service Contract, you will  
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card  
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery  
date. If you have any questions about your service  
contract, call the manufacturers Service Contract Na-  
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.  
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)  
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and  
provisions of DaimlerChryslers warranties applicable to  
this vehicle.  
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service  
contract that is not the manufacturers Service Contract. It  
is not responsible for any service contract other than the  
manufacturers Service Contract. If you purchased a  
service contract that is not a manufacturers Service  
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-  
ers new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to  
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in  
those documents.  
MOPARPARTS  
Moparfluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are  
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your  
vehicle operating at its best.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 281  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
In Canada:  
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you  
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause  
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately  
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-  
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you  
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-  
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety  
defect to the Canadian government should write to  
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations  
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B  
3V9.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an  
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the  
manufacturer.  
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS  
To order the following manuals, you may use either the  
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-  
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-  
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call  
for an order form.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety  
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–  
9153), or go to http:/ / www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:  
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC  
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from the Hotline.  
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering  
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
282 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Service Manuals.  
Owner’s Manuals.  
These comprehensive service manuals provide the  
information that students and professional technicians  
need in diagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,  
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler  
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge  
of the vehicle, system and/ or components is written in  
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams  
and charts.  
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance  
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you  
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are  
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-  
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and  
safety tips.  
Call Toll Free at:  
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)  
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.  
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)  
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,  
these practical manuals make it easy for students and  
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-  
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show  
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,  
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability  
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list  
of all tools and equipment.  
Or  
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:  
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com  
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 283  
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM  
TIRE QUALITY GRADES  
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-  
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-  
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tires  
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall  
of the tires on your car.  
Traction Grades  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,  
and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on  
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions  
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and  
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-  
mance.  
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety  
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.  
WARNING!  
Treadwear  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not  
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or  
peak traction characteristics.  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-  
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-  
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1  
1/ 2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and  
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations  
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road  
characteristics and climate.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
284 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE  
Temperature Grades  
WARNING!  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,  
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat  
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the  
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and  
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The  
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all  
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-  
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test  
wheel than the minimum required by law.  
The temperature grade for this tire is established for  
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load-  
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause  
heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INDEX  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
286 INDEX  
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 233  
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Aiming Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,135  
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . 134,140  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,226  
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,36  
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,36,38,47,89  
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 32,37  
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Alterations/ Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,255  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16  
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,151,238,257  
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,150  
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 287  
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,257  
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Brake/ Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 149,151  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,251  
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,225  
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,224  
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Belts, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,236  
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,108,110  
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
CD (Compact Disc) Changer . . . . . . 106,111,116,119  
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . 104,113,115,126  
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 253  
Central Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288 INDEX  
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,41,42,44  
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,246  
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Wood Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Compact Disc (CD) Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Compact Disc (CD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,104  
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,234  
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
Rubber and Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 224  
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 289  
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,132,138  
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,214  
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,214  
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,256  
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,255  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Door Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
10  
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290 INDEX  
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218,255,256  
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,255  
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,180,231  
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
Exterior Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,182  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,90,252  
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,256  
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 291  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,255  
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,91  
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,20  
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,89  
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66  
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292 INDEX  
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,135  
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Hood Latch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,238  
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,87  
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 293  
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,228  
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,254  
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249  
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,66,89,251  
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,62  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,38,47,89  
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,153  
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249  
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,66  
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,90,252  
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
10  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
294 INDEX  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,56  
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Modifications/ Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,280  
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Cylinder Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
Luggage/ Cargo Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218,255,256  
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,256  
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218  
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Light Duty Schedule “B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272  
Schedule “B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,216  
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 295  
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,255  
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,255  
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 215,216  
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Operator Manual (Owners Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 73,77  
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,73,77  
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,113,126,128  
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
296 INDEX  
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,108,113  
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,44  
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 297  
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 232,256  
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,11  
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,171  
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 70,88  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,227  
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 91,199  
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
298 INDEX  
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,167,283  
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164  
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,167  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Tongue Weight/ Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,209,210  
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,88,157  
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,157  
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,151,238  
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX 299  
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,185  
Vehicle Modifications/ Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
(HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,89  
Warning, Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,230  
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,79  
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,37  
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
10  
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283  
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
300 INDEX  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,230  
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67,229  
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Wood Trim Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

BenQ Computer Monitor GL2030 User Manual
Black Decker Blender FP1335 User Manual
Bosch Power Tools Saw CM8S User Manual
Can Am Offroad Vehicle DS650 User Manual
Canon All in One Printer 1827B001 User Manual
Casio Cash Register 0205 H User Manual
Casio Clock E 9 User Manual
Cateye Home Safety Product ABS 10 User Manual
CFM Fan CEB 0807 User Manual
Chauvet Cassette Player LXW User Manual